JP7287687B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game or a specific game that is advantageous to the player based on establishment of a start condition.

Among such gaming machines, there are those that execute a special game based on the passage of a game medium through a specific area provided inside a winning device during the execution of a specific game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-057968 A

However, the game machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on establishment of a starting condition, and based on the determination result of the determination means, Variation display execution means for performing variation display of special symbols in any of a plurality of variation patterns, game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous than the normal game state, and a game an initialization means capable of initializing the control state of; and a variable performance for variably displaying a plurality of performance symbols during the variable display of the special symbols, and a first performance mode; A production control means that can be controlled in a second production mode different from the first production mode, and the determination means includes a first determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first start condition, and a second and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition, the special game includes a first special game and a second special game more advantageous than the first special game, The specific game state includes a first specific game state controlled via the special game and a second specific game state controlled without the special game, and the game state control means is , It is possible to control to the first specific game state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game is finished, and the special game that becomes a losing result executed after the establishment of a predetermined condition It is possible to control to the second specific game state by the number of consecutive times of symbol fluctuation display reaching a specified number of times, and the effect control means controls to the second specific game state a predetermined number of times before When the variable display of the special symbols is executed, it is possible to control from the first performance mode to the second performance mode, and the variable display execution means is adapted to execute the special game when the predetermined condition is established. When it is controlled to the second specific game state later, and when it is controlled to the second specific game state after the predetermined condition is established by the initialization of the control state of the game, the special with different fluctuation patterns It is possible to execute a variable display of symbols, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect when the specific game state ends when the specific game state ends, It is possible to change the execution mode of the variable performance when the specific game state ends, depending on whether the first specific game state ends or the second specific game state ends. and

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various storage areas of a main RAM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific area|region detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal working hours. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal working hours. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal working hours. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal working hours. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation|variation pattern determination table for special time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special design stop processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a control data determination table. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a small winning game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state setting table. It is a diagram showing a game state to be referred to at the end of the big winning game not via the small winning game. It is a diagram showing a game state referred to at the end of the big winning game via the small winning game. It is a mode flow showing the transition of the game mode. It is a figure which shows the normal figure normal electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the various determination tables used by normal figure normal electric control processing. It is a figure which shows the external information data creation process in a main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the various signals output as game information. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display device in each game area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after setting change; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirmation of settings; 4 is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear process in the main control board of a 1st modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear; 4 is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 2nd modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 3rd modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 4th modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear; It is a timing chart in the case of normal time-saving gaming state occurs. It is a timing chart when the normal time-saving gaming state ends. It is a timing chart from before the start of the special time-saving gaming state to after the end. It is a figure which shows the main process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the light emission production|presentation determination process at the time of winning of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows the look-ahead continuous production determination processing of the production control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table; It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table for time-saving final fluctuation|variation. It is a flow chart which shows special time saving system production processing of a production control part. It is a diagram showing an effect example when the look-ahead effect is executed during the normal game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case variable production|presentation is performed after transfering to rush battle mode. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case it becomes a big hit by the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the last time of rush battle mode. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a normal time saving game state is complete|finished. It is a diagram showing a production example 1 in the case of a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved at the time of transition to the normal game state. It is a diagram showing an example 2 of the effect in the case of winning a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved at the time of transition to the normal game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a small hit game is performed by a super wild dance mode. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation when a time saving game state is interrupted as a result of the small hit game in boisterous dance mode. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case special time reduction system production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in the case of becoming a customer waiting state when it transfers to a special time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a fluctuation|variation production|presentation is performed after transfer to a special time-saving game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the countdown mode is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect when the countdown mode is executed; It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a fluctuation|variation production|presentation is performed after transfer to a special time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a special time saving game state is complete|finished. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state setting table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process of the main control board in the second embodiment.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls (game media) flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decoration plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 made up of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95 (to be described later) are dispensed based on the fulfillment of the granting conditions. an upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper plate 11 and flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later; A shooting operation device 13 is provided which can be operated to shoot the ball.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 with a space therebetween, and produce sound (music, voice) effects by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like. It's like A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 is also provided with a notification LED 10a which is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality occurs such that game balls cannot be put out from the payout device 95.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (Fig. 1 or 2) function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. ) are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a normal state and a normal state of the production button 17. Effect button driving device 17b equipped with a button driving motor for changing to a projecting state located above and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner, A performance button light emission LED 17c is provided for changing the performance button 17 between a light-off state and a lighting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner, so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.例文帳に追加

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

A lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the ball lending machine (not shown) installed side by side with the game machine 1 subtracts the remaining money stored in the storage medium and lends the game balls. When the return button 20b of the rental operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path, and the fullness of the lower tray 12 is detected by the full detection switch 32a. During this time, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 5) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 are provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 (see FIG. 5) for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3 and A lock mechanism (not shown) for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 5) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The shooting device 26 includes a shooting member for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the shooting member, and a shooting device that tilts upward from the shooting member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping a game ball are provided at a launch position that is the inclined lower end of the launch rail. When the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 5) is received at the shooting position, the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-like decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict the entry of the game ball into the inside. The left game area is divided into a left game area where the shot game balls flow down and a right game area where the game balls shot with a second projectile force stronger than the first projectile flow. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the decorative frame 40 , and the warp device 41 moves the interior of the decorative frame 40 below the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow downward.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win a prize (enter a ball) are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, a game One general winning hole 43 in which a ball can always win a prize (enter a ball) is provided. When a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 43 is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (granting conditions are satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. A payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) pays out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (given prize value).

Below the stage portion 42, there is provided a first starting port 45 (first special symbol starting winning region) in which the game ball can always win (entering the ball). When the played game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) (granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). It is designed to be paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball (given prize value). In addition, a right for performing a jackpot determination whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

Directly below the first starting port 45, there is provided a starting port lamp 75 that emits light in a predetermined manner when a lamp lighting effect, which will be described later, is executed. (double exclamation mark), which is an object of the model motif, is formed on the lens member 75a (object).

Note that the model motif object may be provided directly on the front side of the first starting port 45 or may be provided independently near the first starting port 45 and the starting port lamp 75 . In this way, by providing the model motif object at the position corresponding to the first start port 45 where the player's line of sight tends to gather, it is possible to easily impress the player with the model of the gaming machine 1. .

Below the decorative frame 40 and obliquely below the first starting port 45, it is impossible or impossible to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a win is won in the hit determination described later). A variable starter 46 is provided which can be converted from a difficult closed state to an easy open state or a game ball winning state.

The variable starting part 46 has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to serve as a flow path for game balls, and a second starting opening opening and closing member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction. A second starting opening 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the starting opening opening/closing member 48, and a second opening that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting opening 47 By moving the start opening detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) and the second start opening opening/closing member 48 forward (the prize winning regulation position), the second start opening 47 is closed and the second start opening is closed. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 to the open state by moving the opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning position).

Then, a game ball enters the second starting port 47 that is in an open state during an auxiliary game, which will be described later, and this game ball is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (granting conditions are met). ), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (given prize value). In addition, a right for performing a jackpot determination whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

The right game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40 has an upstream channel 91a into which all the game balls shot toward the right game area flow, and almost all of the game balls flowing out from the upstream channel 91a. A central flow path 91b, a left flow path 91c into which game balls bounced to the left without flowing into the central flow path 91b, and a right side into which game balls bounced to the right without flowing into the central flow path 91b Flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e into which almost all the game balls flowed out from the central flow path 91b and the game balls flowed out from the right flow path 91d, and the left side without flowing into the first downstream flow path 91e A second downstream channel 91f is provided into which the game ball that has bounced and the game ball that has flowed out from the left channel 91c flows.

At the upstream end of the central flow path 91b, a normal pattern gate 44 (normal pattern starting area) through which game balls can always pass is provided. Then, the prize ball is not granted, but the right to perform the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) of whether or not to execute the winning game is granted (normal pattern determination information described later is stored).

In the middle of the central flow path 91b, there is a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit in the jackpot determination). A first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted to a state is provided.

The first variable winning part 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (a part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b ), a first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a first big winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, By moving the first big winning hole detection switch 50a for detecting the game ball that has won (entered) the first big winning hole 50 and the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position) For converting the first big winning opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the rear (winning position) to convert the first big winning opening 50 to the open state. A first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 5) is provided.

Then, when the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward during a small winning game to be described later and the first large winning opening opening/closing member 50 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 is opened. The game ball flowing down on the upper surface or the game ball reaching the first big winning hole 50 enters the first big winning hole 50, and the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, downstream of the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, the upper surface slopes down in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls, and a specific area opening and closing that can move in the front-back direction. A member 52, a specific region 53 that opens upward directly below the specific region opening/closing member 52, a specific region detection switch 53a (see FIG. 5) that detects a game ball that has flowed (entered) into the specific region 53, By moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 forward (winning control position), the specific area 53 is converted to the closed state, and by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 backward (winning position), the A channel switching solenoid 52b for converting the region 53 to an open state and a discharge port 54 into which game balls that have not flowed into the specific region 53 flow are provided.

Then, when a game ball passes through (enters) a specific area 53 that is in an open state during a small winning game to be described later, and this game ball is detected by a specific area detection switch 53a, prize balls are not awarded. After the end of the small winning game, a big winning game, which will be described later, is executed.

In addition, without providing the specific area opening/closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, the first large winning opening detection switch 50a is used as the specific area, and the first large winning opening detection switch 50a that is in the open state during the small winning game described later is used. A game ball that has flowed into the winning hole is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, so that a big winning game, which will be described later, may be executed after the small winning game ends.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the big winning game and the small winning game that converts the big winning opening to the open state are treated as special games advantageous to the player, but when the big winning game is treated as a special game and the small winning game is treated as a specific game There is

In the middle of the first downstream flow path 91e, it is possible or easy to win a prize (enter a prize) from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit in the judgment of a big hit). A second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted to an open state is provided.

The second variable winning portion 55 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in the drawing), thereby forming a flow path for game balls (one part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e). ), a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a second large winning opening opening/closing member 56 that opens upward directly below the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 (winning area). Then, the second big winning hole detection switch 56a for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the second big winning hole 56 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 are moved forward (winning regulation position). As a result, the second large winning opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 is moved toward the rear (winning position) to convert the second large winning opening 56 to the open state. A second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 5) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 56 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 flows down. The game ball that has been playing or the game ball that has reached the second big winning hole 56 enters the second big winning hole 56, and when this game ball is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of games are played. Game balls (for example, 10) are paid out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls from a payout device 95 (see FIG. 3).

In addition, the front of the right game area is covered with a decorative member 91 that allows the rear to be seen through. A plurality of front protrusions 91b2 protruding rearward are provided at intervals at a position directly above the member 51 . Furthermore, a plurality of rear projections 91b1 are provided on the back wall of the central flow path 91b (immediately above the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51) so as to alternate with the front projections 91b2. and the front protrusion 91b2 form a meandering flow path, thereby attenuating the flow-down velocity (flow-down force) of the game ball in the central flow path 91b (especially the upper surface of the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51). there is Therefore, it takes one second to flow down from the upstream end to the downstream end on the upper surface of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 .

Furthermore, a plurality of rear projections 91c2 projecting rearward are spaced apart from the rear surface of the decorative member 91 and at a position in front of the first downstream flow path 91e (directly above the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57). are provided with a space between them. Furthermore, a plurality of rear projections 91c1 are provided on the back wall of the first downstream flow path 91e (immediately above the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) so as to alternate with the front projections 91c2. A meandering flow path is formed by the portion 91c1 and the front projecting portion 91c2, thereby attenuating the flow speed (flowing force) of the game ball in the first downstream flow path 91e (especially the upper surface of the second prize winning opening opening/closing member 57). It's like Therefore, it takes one second to flow down from the upstream end to the downstream end on the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 .

The game ball shot into the left game area either flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage section 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. Winning any of the three general prize winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or flowing into the out opening 39. Therefore, the normal figure gate 44 provided in the right game area, the general winning opening 43, the first variable winning part 49 (first big winning part 50) and the second variable winning part 55 (second big winning part 56) winning ( pass).

In addition, the game ball shot to the right game area passes through the upstream flow path 91a, the central flow path 91b (general map gate 44), the left flow path 91c, the right flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, the 2 downstream flow path 91f, etc., one general winning opening 43 provided in the right game area, variable starting portion 46 (second starting opening 47), first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning opening 50), Either the second variable winning portion 55 (the second big winning port 56 ) is won, or the player enters the out port 39 . Therefore, there is no chance of winning the general prize winning opening 43 and the first start opening 45 provided in the left game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 56, and the out opening 39 An out-ball flow path is provided for receiving and gathering out-balls made up of inflowing game balls to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 5) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out ball detection switch 39a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Outside the game area 5a, there are a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61 and a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63 and a second special symbol reservation device. A holding display device consisting of a display 64 and a normal symbol holding display 65, and a main information display 69 consisting of a round number display 66, a right hitting display 67 and a state confirmation display 68 are provided.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination performed based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , The second special symbol display device 61 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47 (entering the ball). The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol hit determination performed based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44 .

The jackpot determination is the special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination when the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute a big hit game or a small hit game based on the obtained special figure determination information.

Then, when a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol display device 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is reported after the lapse of a predetermined time. Stop display of the first special symbol is performed. In addition, when a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and the determination result is notified after the lapse of a predetermined time. Stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big win mode, small win mode, losing mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means a state in which execution of a jackpot game (special game) is determined in the jackpot determination. The "jackpot game" is a round game in which the big winning holes (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) are changed from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined number of times ( For example, 4 times, 10 times, etc.), it means a game state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win prize balls.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth 50, second big winning mouth 56) in each round game are predetermined, Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the big winning hole, one round game ends. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage for the player.

Also, "small hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute a small hit game (special game) in the big hit determination. The "small winning game" means that a player who plays a game in which the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) is changed from the closed state to the open state in a more disadvantageous manner than the big winning game can easily win prize balls. A game state that is advantageous to the player.

The maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small winning game is a predetermined time, but even before the maximum opening time is reached, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening. When (for example, 10) wins (enters a ball), the small hit game ends. In addition, unlike the big winning game, the game state does not change only by executing the small winning game.

Auxiliary game determination is based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 (entrance ball), normal pattern determination information (random number for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained general pattern determination information. It should be noted that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display device 62 performs normal symbol fluctuation display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) for notifying the result of the auxiliary game determination.

It should be noted that the term "hit" in the present embodiment refers to a state in which it is determined that the auxiliary game (hitting game) is to be executed in the auxiliary game determination. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and maximum opening time, the second starting port 47 When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) win a prize (entering a ball), the auxiliary game (hitting game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbols are likely to be satisfied. In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (hitting games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided.

The first special symbol reservation display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45. It is for displaying the number of first reservations (U1), and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reservations. It should be noted that although up to four first reservations are stored, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is for displaying the number of second reservations (U2), and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reservations. It should be noted that although up to four second reservations are stored, the number may be less or more than four, and the second reservations may not be stored.

The normal pattern reservation display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of normal pattern determination information (normal pattern reservation) stored when the game ball wins (passes) in the normal pattern gate 44. It lights up or blinks in a manner that indicates the number of normal map reservations. It should be noted that, although the maximum number of normal pattern reservations is stored up to 4, it may be less than or greater than 4, and the normal pattern reservations may not be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, if the big hit is determined to be a big hit, numbers such as "3" and "7" are displayed stopped, and if it is determined to be a small hit, alphabets such as "A" and "C" are displayed. It is preferable to stop display, and when it is determined that the result is a failure, to stop display "-", and to repeat extinguishing and "-" during variable display.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. Lighting is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that prompts the user to shoot a game ball toward the right game area (so-called righthanded) during a big win state (special game) or a time-saving game state. The LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. is turned on, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (surface) of the game machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether there is The installation position of the status confirmation display 68 may be the front (surface) of the game machine 1, and may be installed in other places.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. may be recognizably displayed. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed. and vice versa.

Also, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the second special symbol reservation display device 64, the round number display device 66, right-handed indicators 67, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be illuminated.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided in the lower part of the effect space 40a. In front of the device 70, a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display formed smaller in size and display area than the first image display device 70 is provided. , a movable effect device 73 for executing an action effect is provided, and a variation notification LED 59 for notifying the variable display state of the special symbol is provided in the right part of the effect space 40a.

In the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, various effects are displayed according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demo effect performed while the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbols 70a performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, and the execution of the jackpot game. There are jackpot performances that are held inside.

In addition, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal moving device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, a motor, etc., while the first image display device 70 is executing a variable effect. It has become.

Specifically, between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a rendering position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70, the vertical direction is changed. It is designed to perform a movement effect by moving (rising, descending) to. The moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or the operation of the effect button 17 may perform a moving effect.

In the display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a variable display area for displaying three production patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) and execution of variable production A mode display area or the like indicating the production mode related to is formed.

In addition, the effect pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and variable display of special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbols, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbols. As the effect pattern 70a, patterns representing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The effect pattern 70a is stop-displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a mode (losing mode, big win mode, small win mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination. The big winning mode and the small winning mode are combinations of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the losing mode is other modes.

The variable display mode of the production pattern 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be switched on the spot or rotated (rotated). good.

In addition, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device according to the result of the big hit determination. By being displayed in 71, the player's expectation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game) is heightened.

The first image display device 70 includes a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first reserved icons (first reserved information) corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) in the normal game state, which will be described later, and , Second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second pending icons (second pending information) corresponding to the second pending number (U2) in the time saving game state described later, and the variable effect is being executed The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that, the first pending number display area 70E for numerically displaying the first pending number (U1), and the second pending number (U2) A second pending number display area 70F and the like for numerically displaying are formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B includes a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), and a third display section 70B3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. , and the fourth display portion 70B4 (fourth area), and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4. Is displayed.

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays a first pending icon indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays the second In the third display portion 70B3, a first reserved icon indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and in the third display portion 70B3, the first special symbol in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. A first pending icon indicating a pending memory is displayed, and a first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4.

The second pending icon display area 70D includes, from the left, a first display portion 70D1 (first area), a second display portion 70D2 (second area), a third display portion 70D3 (third area), a fourth display portion 70D4 ( 4th area), and the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) is displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4.

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays the second In the third display portion 70D3, a second holding icon indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and in the third display portion 70D3, the second special symbol in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. A second pending icon indicating a pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70D4 displays a second pending icon indicating a second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D. The icon is displayed as follows.

Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the first suspended icons displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B move toward the icon display area 70C one by one. By moving (shifting), the first pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 is moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (deletes) at the end of

Also, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the second suspended icon displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D moves one by one (shift ), the second pending icon displayed in the first display unit 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 performs the variable display of the production pattern 70a. You may perform the variable display of the production|presentation design 70a.

The movable effect device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that are operable. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined action, it is possible to execute an action effect. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, so that it is possible to emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the action effect. .

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is positioned at a standby position (first position) near the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 and at a center side (lower side) of the first image display device 70. It moves (rises and descends) between the presenting position (second position). The second movable member 73b moves between a waiting position (first position) covering a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position retreating from the front of the first movable member 73a. .

The variation notification LED 59 is composed of full-color LEDs, and is provided with a first variation notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second variation notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first variation notification LED 59a starts a change in color (variation display of the first special symbol) corresponding to the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the color corresponding to the stop of the variation display of the first special symbol. By stopping the change (variation display of the first special symbol), it is notified whether or not the first special symbol is variably displayed. The second variation notification LED 59b starts changing the color (variation display of the second special symbol) in response to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and changes the color in response to the stop of the variation display of the second special symbol. By stopping the change (variation display of the second special symbol), it is notified whether or not the second special symbol is variably displayed.

In addition, the combination of the stop-displayed production design 70a and the first special design notifies the result of the fluctuation display (jackpot judgment) of the first special design, and the combination of the stop-displayed production design 70a and the second special design. You may make it alert|report the result of the variable display (special game range) of a 2nd special design. In addition, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol (jackpot determination) is notified only by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol (jackpot determination) is notified only by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed. You may make it alert|report a result.

In addition, instead of performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first variation notification LED 59a and the second variation notification LED 59b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the first image display device 70 or the second special symbol. The two-image display device 71 may be used for variable display.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility, etc. A main control device 110A containing a game ball storage part 96 for storing balls and supplying them to a payout device 95, a main control board 110, a payout control device 120A containing a payout control board 120, and a performance control board 130 are built in. A performance control device 130A, a power supply device 160A containing a power supply board 160, and a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer) are provided.

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member 23 is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74). A selector switch 22 is provided for switching between adjustment modes related to the adjustment of the amount of light.

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (jackpot judgment RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value (probability of judging a jackpot), and inputting a signal for shifting to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operating the setting key. A setting key switch 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the horizontal direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute setting. A numeric segment is configured to display numeric information indicating numeric values of values and performance information (see FIG. 49).

(Structure of game board)
Next, referring to FIG. 4, the configuration of the game board 5 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5. FIG.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 forming the front side of the game board 5 and a rear unit 501 forming the rear side of the game board 5 .

The board unit 500 has a game board 500a made of transparent resin on which the game area 5a is formed on the surface by the inner rails 35 and the outer rails 36 described above, and a window is formed so that the rear can be viewed. .

And inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-described decorative frame 40, the general winning opening 43, the normal figure gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), the first start opening 45 (first start opening detection switch 45a), the variable Starting portion 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning port 50, first big winning port detection switch 50a, First big winning opening opening/closing member 51, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, specific area 53, specific area detection switch 53a, channel switching solenoid 52b, discharge port 54), and second variable winning part 55 (second A large winning opening 56, a second large winning opening detection switch 56a, a second large winning opening opening/closing member 57, and a second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are provided, and the main information display 69 described above is provided outside the game area 5a. is provided.

A certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp with identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided at the lower right portion of the game board 500a so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction with the left side as an axis. At the four corners of 500a, fixtures 503a for detachably attaching board unit 500 and back unit 501 are provided.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed by pinching the right side of the certificate stamp plate with the fingertips and rotating it leftward.

The fixture 503a includes an operation portion located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft portion extending from the operation portion to the back side of the game board 500a, and a shaft portion provided at the tip of the shaft portion and on the back side of the game board 500a. and an engaging piece positioned on the side thereof, and the engaging piece changes between a first state (non-engagement posture) and a second state (engagement posture) by operating the operating portion. there is

The back unit 501 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with an open front surface, and has a unit base 501a formed with a window portion for allowing the rear side to be visually recognized. , a movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), etc. are provided, and a first image display device 70 is provided behind the window. 130 A of production control devices are provided in the rear side of the 1st image display device 70, and 110 A of main control devices are provided under 130A of production control devices.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixing receiving portions 503b are provided for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixtures 503a.

When the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 are attached, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engaging posture). A male connector CN provided at the tip of a harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through a through hole HA provided in the right side of the back unit 501 . After that, when the rear surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the rear surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a enters the fixing receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to set the engagement pieces to the second state (engagement posture), the engagement pieces are engaged with the fixed receiving portions 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are connected. is fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the board unit 500 Then, the installation work of the rear unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A is pulled out, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened. Thereafter, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to bring the engaging pieces into the first state, the engagement between the engaging pieces and the fixing receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are withdrawn from the fixing receiving portions 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the work of removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the standpoint of the gaming machine 1 like new. Therefore, here, the attachment and detachment of the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 in a state in which the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the above.

Specifically, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via the lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, only the board unit 500 can be replaced (like new). Therefore, when only the board unit 500 is to be replaced, it is preferable to perform the above-described removal work after opening the glass frame 4 .

(Overall block diagram of game machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the block diagram of the entire game machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls overall progress of the game (basic action), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110. Board 120, production control board 130 for controlling game-related production based on reception of production control commands from main control board 110, main control board 110, payout control board 120 and power supply board for supplying power to production control board 130 160 is provided.

In addition, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to transmit and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the main control board 110. It is configured to be able to transmit commands only in one direction to the board 130 .

The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports. It has 110m.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first start opening detection switch 45a, a second start opening detection switch 47a, and opening and closing of the second start opening. Solenoid 48b, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, specific area detection switch 53a, second big winning opening detection switch 56a, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b , magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol suspension display 63, second special symbol suspension display 64 , normal symbol holding display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control A substrate 120 and an effect control substrate 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to games. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission and reception of various control commands. It performs control processing and the like for transmitting game information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the game information output terminal board 90 .

In the "game information", the starting opening winning signal output each time a game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped. A pattern confirmation signal output every time, a jackpot signal output during a jackpot game, an opening signal output during a round game (opening of the big winning opening), output over a time-saving game state described later and a security signal output when a situation (RWM clear, error, etc.) that poses a problem (threat) in terms of security of the game machine 1 occurs.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory area of the main ROM 110b includes a game ROM area in which programs and data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored. An unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored together with the above, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, and a vector table in which the start address of the timer interrupt process described later is set. An area and an HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in this order.

The game ROM area includes a game program area in which a program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data relating to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area to which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the game machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the game machine. are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when the information program is executed are arranged in order. there is

The game RWM area consists of a game work area used as a work by the game program, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the game program is temporarily stored. A game stack area to be temporarily saved and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The game work area includes a set value area for storing set values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (a checksum to be described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes according to the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data (variation count, various time saving state flags, various time saving counts, etc., which will be described later) are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area used by the information program as a work area, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. Information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information relating to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information relating to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on a game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on an information program will be described. Describe relationships.

When the main CPU 110a performs a process based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and, while using the game RWM area as a work, refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area. ing. Also, when performing processing based on an information program, basically the data area for information is referenced, and the contents of the RWM area for information are referenced and updated while using the RWM area for information as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

When performing processing based on the information program, after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the program is completed and the game program is returned to.

Immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set. immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when processing based on the information program is performed, and inconvenience will occur when returning from the information program to the game program. will disappear.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 95, and a switch 95a for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that a game ball is stored is connected to the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage portion 96 of the above.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing regarding the payout of game balls. Thereby, control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 according to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting the command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, and the like (not shown).
The input/output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 by means of a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feed solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b, and launches the ball. When the detection signal from the volume 15b detects that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is adjusted so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to shoot game balls (99.9 balls/minute).

The production control board 130 is based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130m and the production control unit 130m, which comprehensively controls the progress of production based on the reception of the production control command from the main control board 110. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing for audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing for various light emitting members (such as LEDs) and various drive sources (such as motors) based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m. It has

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output ports of the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the effect while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Thereby, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, control processing for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, various input devices (detection switch etc.) according to the detection signal from control processing, and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, or outputs a predetermined sound to the audio output device 9. and control the output of sound.

The display control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141. The image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on the reception, the CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and the reception of the voice control command from the general control unit 141 It has an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) for controlling the audio output device 9 based on the data, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes an integrated CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which a LSI) is connected.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting the display control command (display list) to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device 9, and performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include the frame illumination device 10, the effect button driving device 17b (the effect button driving motor, the effect button vibration motor), the effect button light emission LED 17c, the starting port lamp 75, the movable effect device 73, the board A lighting device 74 is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to effects. As a result, the control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the effect button drive device 17b, the effect button emission LED 17c, the starting port lamp 75, the movable effect device 73, and the board lighting device 74 is performed.

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, Effect control board 130 and various electronic components) (corresponding to power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (occurrence of a power failure), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in the power supply voltage (occurrence of a power failure). It has a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. Output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped when the power supply voltage exceeds a predetermined value during output.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from the power failure (power failure), the control state of the game can be restored to the state before the power failure (power failure). can be done.

In addition, although the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control unit 130m, the payout control board 120 and A backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control unit 130m. Also, the backup power may be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the effect control section 130m.

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" and a "time-saving game state" as states relating to the ease of winning a game ball into the second starting port 47.

The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to "normal game state". Also, during the jackpot game, the "normal game state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" means that in the auxiliary game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal figure gate 44, the probability of being determined as a hit is 1/256. It refers to a game state in which the average time of variable display of normal symbols is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 0.180 seconds when winning is won.

On the other hand, in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of being determined to be a hit is set as high as 255/256, the average time of variable display of normal symbols is set to about 3 seconds, and it is determined to be a hit. The opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 6 seconds in this case, so that the consumption of game balls is suppressed compared to the normal game state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, the transition from the normal game state to the time-saving game state is performed after the jackpot game is finished.

In addition, the "time-saving game state" includes a normal time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game described later (via the jackpot game), and establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear is executed, based on the end of the jackpot game A special time-saving game state that is controlled (without going through a jackpot game) by reaching a specified number of times (500 times in this embodiment) of the special symbol fluctuation display executed from 0 clear of the number of fluctuations) is set.

It should be noted that the "time-saving game state" is set to be more advantageous than the "normal game state" in terms of the average fluctuation time of normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the probability of being determined as winning. , the average fluctuation time of normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined as winning may be set to be advantageous.

Although the probability of winning is determined to be 1/256 in the normal game state, the probability of being determined to be winning may be set to 0/256 so as not to be determined to be winning. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the normal game state, and the game ball does not enter (win) the second starting port 47 .

(Various storage areas of main RAM)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 6(a) stores the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 and/or the second start port 47. It is a diagram showing a determination information storage area, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special figure determination information storage area, FIG. It is a general pattern determination information storage area in which normal pattern determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 6( a ), the special figure determination information storage area stores special figure determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 . A second special figure determination information holding storage area for storing special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47, and a special figure determination information during execution of the variable display. It is divided into a special figure determination information storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are each divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit.

The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display unit 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. They correspond to the portion 70B2, the third display portion 70B3, and the fourth display portion 70B4, respectively. Also, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area are the first display unit 70D1, the second display unit 70D2 of the second holding icon display area 70D, They correspond to the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of special figure determination information (reservation information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area is the first number of reservations (U1), and these special figure determination information A corresponding number of first pending icons are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. In addition, the number of special figure determination information (reservation information) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information is the second number of reservations (U2), and the number corresponding to these determination information Suspended icons are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second suspended icon display area 70D.

Moreover, the 0th memory|storage part which is a special figure determination information execution memory|storage area corresponds to the said icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), each storage unit includes a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a special symbol determination random number storage area for storing a special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random number value.

Then, when the game ball wins (entrance) to the first start port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in a storage unit with a small number. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest number in which the special figure determination information is not stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is the special figure stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted and referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage part of the second special symbol determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. will be referenced to execute the

As shown in FIG. 6(c), the normal pattern determination information storage area is a normal pattern determination information storage area in which the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 is stored. It is divided into a general pattern determination information storage area in which the general pattern determination information being displayed is stored, and the general pattern determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively. In addition, the number of general pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the general pattern determination information reservation storage area is the number of general pattern determination information.

As shown in FIG. 6(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing a normal symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern for storing the random number value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern determination information is acquired, the normal pattern determination information is not stored in the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. Normal figure determination information is stored.

The 0th storage unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the normal pattern is satisfied. It will be referred to for executing the variable display of normal symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, preparation processing for starting game control, setting change processing for changing set values based on a setting change operation, and initialization of a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming setting values based on setting confirmation operation, various drive sources provided in the board unit 500 (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching Drive source initial operation processing and the like for initializing the solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are performed. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for special symbol determination and the random number value for reach determination. Update the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop in the power supply from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply that has been supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). Determines whether or not a signal is input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time, it is assumed that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S54. Assuming that there is a possibility, the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt, and in step S55, issues a power cut-off designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that power cut-off processing has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cut-off designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in a payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, when the remaining payout designation command is received, the remaining payout specified by the remaining payout designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout designation command is not received, the remaining Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in a payout control process of timer interruption, which will be described later, and a command specifying the number of payouts corresponding to the remaining number of payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the game RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (restored power supply) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62 prohibits RWM access, After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason at the time of the momentary power failure, the setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, and RWM clear processing are not executed. The game machine does not operate unintendedly, and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, it is determined that the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S17. If the backup flag is not saved, the first power-on or irregular power restoration The process proceeds to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power interruption during execution of S35.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S19 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value (probability of judging the jackpot), which is the degree of advantage of the game, is changed (updated), and the setting key switch 112a is operated. Performs processing to determine the set value by . After completing this process, the process moves to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S22. to move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal because it is the first time the power is turned on or the power is restored irregularly as described above, and the process proceeds to step S22. will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing (game program) in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing non-recoverable error notification indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is to display an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the audio output device 9 indicates that an unrecoverable error has occurred. An error sound (“This is an unrecoverable error” + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S23. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S24 assuming that the RWM clearing operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, current A process for initially operating the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for a predetermined period is performed. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S33. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying an initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power-on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame Illumination device 10 for disk and illumination device 74 for disk are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the voice output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, the RWM area is cleared on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. You may make it display the display which alert|reports that.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, a process for displaying the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 and ending the confirmation of the set values by operating the setting key switch 112a. I do.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S29. Specifically, the above-described various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the flow channel switching solenoid 52b, the second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are initialized for a predetermined period. Perform processing to make it work. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (0 clearing) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing power supply recovery notification indicating that the setting confirmation notification or the like is terminated and the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or The lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). It is to output a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S32. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S33. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S34, and permits all interrupts in step S35 to control the progress of the game (main control). A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initialization process is finished.

In other words, from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is in a pre-start state before the start of the game progress control. It will be in a state where it is possible to play.

In this way, the state confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 70, and the second By checking the image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed. It is possible to recognize that it is inside. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

Also, by not determining the presence or absence of the setting changing flag, even if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change, the unrecoverable error process may not be performed.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing. .

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing (game program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). , and controls the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the opening time of the special electric accessory.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs specific random number update processing (game program). Specifically, the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging the special pattern, the random number for judging the special pattern variation pattern, the random number for judging the hit, the random number for judging the normal pattern, and the random number for judging the regular pattern fluctuation pattern are updated. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are incremented by +1 and updated. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The initial random value to be used is set as a new cycle initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs initial random number update processing (game program). Specifically, similar to step S30, the process of updating the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number value for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an input control process (game program) in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. , determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the specific area detection switch 53a, and sets predetermined data if there is an input. Details of the input control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process (game program) in step S300. Specifically, determination of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, the fluctuation display of the first special design or the second special design, the big winning opening Processing such as opening/closing (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) and setting of the game state is performed. In addition, the detail of special figure special electric control processing is mentioned later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a general/universal electric power control process (game program). Specifically, processing such as determination of acquired general pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the general pattern gate 44, normal symbol fluctuation display, opening and closing of the second start port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like are performed. In addition, the details of the general map general electric control processing are mentioned later.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electrical control process, the type of loss normal pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing (game program) in step S500. Specifically, various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c are referred to, and various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the big winning opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 .

The main CPU 110a performs abnormality determination processing (game program) in step S600. Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as game balls winning in the second start port 47 when not in the auxiliary game, game balls winning in the big winning port when not in the special game, various winning Abnormal prize-winning error where the number of game balls that have won a prize does not match the number of game balls discharged from the prize-winning ball flow path, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error in which an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 58a for a predetermined period of time, a door open error in which the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a during game progress control. or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) is generated, and a process for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the generated error to the effect control board 130 is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes processing for performing error notification.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing (game program) in step S700. Specifically, the starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the large winning opening opening/closing data output to the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, and the first special symbol Display device 60, special design display data output to second special design display device 61, normal design display data output to normal design display device 62, first special design reservation display device 63, second special design reservation display device 64 A process for creating data such as special symbol reserved display data to be output and normal symbol reserved display data to be output to the normal symbol reserved display device 65 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs external information data creation processing in step S720. Specifically, processing for creating game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. Details of the external information data creation process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (game program) in step S750. Specifically, a port output for outputting signals such as the starting opening opening/closing data created in step S700 and the big winning opening opening/closing data, or outputting a signal such as game information data created in step S720 Processing, display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reservation display data, normal symbol reservation display data, payout state confirmation for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 Sending a specified command to the payout control board 120 or referring to a prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) to be described later, a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 .

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the normal medium payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during normal gaming state, out during normal gaming state For counting game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. process.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game performance information that is not affected by changes in the set values (unrelated to the set values). By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it is possible to make use of this in grasping the performance of the game machine 1 .

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for playing, and the normal base values for four game intervals including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data. Details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear mode, and during the setting confirmation mode) before the progress control of the game is started, the timer interruption is not executed. Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and pays out the prize balls from the payout device 95. process.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball wins the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56 It is determined whether or not the game has been played, and processing for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the first start opening detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start opening 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and a prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. The details of the second start opening detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, the processing for determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the general pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing the general pattern determination information I do.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs specific area detection switch input processing, and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and sets predetermined data. Details of the specific area detection switch input process will be described later.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first start opening detection switch input processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-ball counter used for the 3-ball prize by adding the data indicating the 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, determines the special figure. Acquire information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first pending number (U1) is less than four in step S230-4. If the first reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and if the first reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start port detection switch input process exit.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first pending number (U1) and updates it (U1←U1+1). The corresponding first special symbol storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol memory specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a free storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special feature acquired in step S230-3 in the free storage unit. The figure determination information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a normal game state (normal game state). When it is in the normal game state, the processing is moved to step S230-9 as prefetching processing of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, and the process is not in the normal game state. In this case, the current first start opening detection switch input process is terminated as not performing the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 .

The main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (pre-determination process) in step S230-9. In this first look-ahead process, the pre-determination table (see FIG. 23 (a) or FIG. 23 (b)) for pre-reading the special figure determination information (preliminary determination) is selected, and the special figure determination information acquired this time is selected. Prior determination is made before the variation display of 1 special symbol is performed, and a process of generating a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the prior determination (special figure scheduled variation pattern) is performed. Details of the advance determination table will be described later.

Since this "first look-ahead specified command" is information that can specify the special figure scheduled variation pattern, the effect control board 130 uses the first look-ahead specified command to determine the type of special symbol, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, and the special symbol. It is also possible to specify the type, the type of jackpot game or small hit game (number of rounds), and the number of times of time saving (J1, J2, J3) in the time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game.

At step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first prefetch designation command generated at step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first look-ahead winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and before the start of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command, one or a plurality of variable displays are performed over the jackpot. A pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) for expecting the execution of the game is executed.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the first pending number (U1) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second reserved number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the second reserved number. Furthermore, the first reservation storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the first special figure determination information storage area.

(Processing for inputting the second start opening detection switch on the main control board)
The second start opening detection switch input processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the second starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input. When the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and when the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input, the current first 2 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding data indicating two prize balls to the two prize ball counter used for two prize balls to update the counter, and in step S240-3, determines a special figure. Acquire information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second pending number (U2) is less than four in step S240-4. If the second reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-5, and if the second reservation number (U2) is not less than 4, this second start port detection switch input process exit.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second pending number (U2) and updates it (U2←U2+1). A corresponding second special symbol storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the second special symbol memory specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the second reserved icons corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) are displayed on the image display device.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for an empty storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special feature acquired in step S240-3 in the empty storage unit. The figure determination information is stored.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the time-saving game state. If it is in the time-saving gaming state, the processing is moved to step S240-9 as prefetching processing of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47, and during the non-time-saving gaming state If not, the second start opening detection switch input process is terminated as not performing the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 47.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines that the remaining number of times of time saving (here, the second number of times of saving time (J2), not the first number of times of saving time (J1) or the third number of times of saving time (J3)) is a predetermined number ( For example, 5 times) or more. If the remaining number of time saving times is a predetermined number or more, the process is moved to step S240-10, and if the remaining number of time saving times is not a predetermined number or more, it is acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47. The second start opening detection switch input process of this time is terminated as not performing the prefetching process of the special figure determination information.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a performs a second look-ahead process (pre-determination process). In this second look-ahead process, the pre-determination table (see FIG. 26 (c)) for pre-reading (pre-determination) the special figure determination information is selected, and the special figure determination information acquired this time is displayed in the second special symbol. Prior determination is performed, and the result of the prior determination (special figure scheduled variation pattern, prefetch information) is performed to generate a second prefetch designation command for notifying the effect control board 130.

Since this "second look-ahead designation command" is information that can specify the determination result of the special figure determination information, the effect control board 130 uses the second look-ahead designation command to determine the type of special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the special It is also possible to specify the type of symbol, the type of jackpot game or small hit game (number of rounds), and the number of times of saving time (J1, J2, J3) in the normal time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game.

At step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second prefetch designation command generated at step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the second look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and from before the start of the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second look-ahead designation command, the jackpot game is played over one or a plurality of variation displays. is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the second pending number (U2) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Also, the upper limit value of the second reserved number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the first reserved number. Furthermore, the second reservation storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Specific area detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The specific area detection switch input process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a. If the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is input, the process proceeds to step S260-2, and if the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is not input, the current specific area detection switch input End the process.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current specific area validity period during which the passage of game balls to the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a small hit game (conversion game) is in progress. If it is during the small winning game, the process is moved to step S260-3, and if it is not during the specific area effective period, the process is moved to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and a specific flag indicating the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53. Area passage time game state information (information indicating that it is in the normal game state if the current is in the normal game state, information indicating that it is in the reduced time game state if the current is in the time saving game state) area, and in step S260-4, a specific area passage designation command indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the specific area valid period is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, Terminates the specific area detection switch input process.

As a result, a specific area passage specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a passage notification effect for notifying that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 (execution of a jackpot game) is executed. Therefore, the player can grasp that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the current specific area. Terminate the detection switch input process.

As a result, a specified area passage error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a passage error notification performance for notifying the occurrence of a passage error in which the game ball passes the specified area 53 at an abnormal timing is executed. Therefore, the employee of the game parlor can grasp the occurrence of the passing error and take appropriate measures.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the special figure special electric control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes processing corresponding to the branch destination address, This special figure special electric control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the processing for starting the variable display of the special symbol based on the pending memory (special figure determination information) and the special figure special electric processing data are changed to "1" A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed for performing a process for performing a process for performing the process.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the special figure is stopped and displayed according to the passage of the fluctuation time, and the special figure special electric processing data is changed to "2". A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing processes and the like is executed.
If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0" if the special symbol is a losing special symbol, and the opening time of the jackpot game is set if the special symbol is a special symbol. Then, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small winning special symbol, the opening time of the small winning game is set and the special symbol stop processing ( Step S330) is executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot game processing ( Step S340) is executed.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the special figure special electric processing data is changed to "0" or "3" based on the processing for executing the small winning game and the ending of the small winning game. For small winning game processing (step S350) is executed.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 5, the jackpot game end processing for performing the processing for ending the jackpot game, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0" based on the end of the ending of the jackpot game, etc. (Step S360) is executed.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. If the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second pending number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

The main CPU 110a updates the second reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S310-3, and designates special symbol storage corresponding to the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores the command in the second special figure determination information storage area. Shift processing of the stored data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit The special figure determination information used in the previous game that was held is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first pending number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If the first reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reservation number (U1) after subtraction. is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Perform shift processing of the data that has been, to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit ~ fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation number (U1) and the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. set to As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the second hold number is shifted to the first hold However, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special figure judgment information holding storage area is shifted (first The number of reservations and the second number of reservations may be subtracted in order of winning), or the first special figure determination information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area (the first number of reservations may be It may be subtracted with priority over the second reservation number.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit and the stop special figure data of the special symbols based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. Execute the jackpot determination process. The details of the big hit determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. I do. The details of the special figure variation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variation performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variation performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 , to start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800. In the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. When the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and when the customer waiting state flag is not set, the processing is moved to step S319-2. It should be noted that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and the special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirements include that the variable display of normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. may

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect for prompting the player to play is performed.

(Jackpot judgment processing of the main control board)
The jackpot determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, determines whether or not the jackpot is a big win (whether or not it is a small win). Select the judgment table (see FIG. 17). Details of the big hit determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a collates the current set value and the random value for judging a big win with the big-hit judging table, and judges whether or not it is a big win (whether or not it is a small win). If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-4, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the game state information at the time of winning the big win in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. A table (see FIG. 18(a)) is selected, and the process moves to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for big hits will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a collates the current set value and the random number value for big win determination with the big win determination table to determine whether or not it is a small win. If it is a small win, the process moves to step S311-7, and if it is not a small win, it is assumed that the win is lost and the process moves to step S311-8.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects the small winning special symbol determination table (see FIG. 18(b)) for determining the type of the small winning special symbol, and shifts the process to step S311-9. In addition, the details of the special symbol determination table for small hits will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for losing (see FIG. 18(c)) for determining the special losing symbols, and shifts the process to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for losing will be described later.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the random number value for special symbol determination with the special symbol determination table for which the jackpot determination is to be performed, A special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is determined.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the big hit determination process.

(Special pattern judgment table)
FIG. 7(a) is a special symbol determination table for a big hit, which is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined as a big hit, and FIG. 7(b) is determined as a small hit. It is a special symbol determination table for a small hit that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol at the time, and FIG. It is a special symbol determination table for.

As shown in FIGS. 18(a) to (c), the special symbol determination table contains the special symbol type for determining the stop symbol, the random number for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the determination. The stop special figure data indicating the result and the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination are associated, and the lighting mode of the LED in the special symbol display is described in the rightmost column for reference.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special pattern "01" is a special jackpot pattern for executing a first jackpot game consisting of three round games, and the special pattern "02" is for executing a second jackpot game consisting of three round games. The special symbol "03" is a big winning special symbol for executing the first big winning game consisting of three round games, and the special symbol "11" consists of ten round games. It is a jackpot pattern for executing the fourth jackpot game. In addition, the special symbol "12" is a special jackpot pattern for executing the fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 round games, and the special pattern "13" is a small hit special pattern for executing the first small prize game. The special symbol "14" is a small winning special symbol for executing the second small winning game, and the special symbol "15" is a small winning special symbol for executing the third small winning game. ing.

Although the details will be described later, the degree of advantage of various jackpot games is the third jackpot game<first jackpot game<second jackpot game<fourth jackpot game=fifth jackpot game.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the types of the big winning special symbol, the small winning special symbol, and the losing special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, at least one of the special jackpot pattern and the special jackpot pattern may be one type.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the selection ratio of various losing symbols, the selection ratio of various big hit special symbols, and the selection ratio of various small winning symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. is mentioned. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

As a third feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18, the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying the big hit special symbol is smaller than the number of small hit special symbols and losing special symbols. The point is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp the type of the displayed special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol indicator that lights up is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp the type of the displayed special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18, the LED (light emitting member) of the special symbol indicator that lights up when displaying the small winning special symbol lights up when displaying the losing special symbol. The point is that the same LED (light emitting member) as the special symbol display is included. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that it is not a big winning special symbol but a small winning special symbol or a losing special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18, the special symbol determination information (first special symbol) obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is a jackpot (first result). When it is determined, it is possible to execute any one of the first to third jackpot games, and the special symbol determination information (second special symbol) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47 is a jackpot (First result), any one of the fourth to fifth jackpot games can be executed. By doing so, the type of jackpot game that can be executed changes according to the type of special symbol, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Although each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with one unsuccessful special symbol, at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with a plurality of unsuccessful special symbols. good too.

Also, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that is lit when displaying the big hit special symbol may be more than three or may be less than three. Also, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that lights when displaying the small winning special symbol may be more than two or may be less than two, but even in this case, the big winning special symbol It may be made different from the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that is lit when displaying .

In addition, the LED of the special symbol indicator that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol and the LED of the special symbol indicator that lights up when displaying the losing special symbol are not included (if they are completely different can be used).

Also, although the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol does not win a small win, it may be possible to win a small win. In this case, it is preferable to make the winning probability lower than that of the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Special figure variation pattern determination processing of the main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. If it is in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S313-2, and if it is not in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S313-3 assuming that it is in the time-saving game state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding (matching game situation) table from the normal special figure variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 20) for determining the special figure variation pattern in the normal game state. Then, the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure variation pattern determination table for normal will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a, from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving (see FIGS. 21 to 25) for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the time saving gaming state, corresponds (matches the game situation) table is selected, and the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure variation pattern determination table for time saving will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol type, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random number value, the pending number (U1 or U2), and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value. A special figure variation pattern is determined by collating with a special figure variation pattern determination table.

The main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c in step S313-5, and the special figure variation corresponding to the determined variation pattern in step S313-6. A pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect, is performed.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a determines the number of variations stored in the main RAM 110c. The number of fluctuation display of the pattern is updated by +1. The number of fluctuations is updated by +1 regardless of whether it is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a first special symbol variable display, or a second special symbol variable display. It should be noted that the number of fluctuations will be referred to in special symbol fluctuation processing, which will be described later.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the time-saving gaming state. If it is not in the time-saving gaming state, this time's special figure variation pattern determination table is terminated, and if it is in the time-saving gaming state, in step S313-9, a time-saving number of times designation command corresponding to the remaining number of time-savings is transmitted for production. Set in the data storage area. As a result, the command for specifying the number of times of shortening of working hours is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the remaining number of times of shortening of hours is notified. When this process is finished, the special figure variation pattern determination process of this time is finished.

(Normal special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20 is a normal special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the special symbol variation pattern in the normal game state.

Specifically, FIG. 20(a) executes variation display when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c or when there is jackpot history information and the number of fluctuations to the special time-saving gaming state is 51 times or more. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for normal that is referred to when (production modes A to C), and FIG. is a special figure variation pattern determination table 2 for normal that is referred to when performing variation display when is 50 times or less (during a countdown mode to be described later), and FIG. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 3 for normal use, which is referred to when performing variation display corresponding to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after shifting to the state.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for normal time reduction)
21 to 24 are special symbol variation pattern determination tables for normal time reduction which are referred to when determining the variation pattern of special symbols in the normal time reduction gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 21(a) shows when 7 times is selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time saving game state and the remaining number of small hits is 1 time. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for normal time reduction that is referred to when executing the variable display before the final time reduction (during rush battle mode described later), and FIG. When executing the variable display of the final time-saving when the second special pattern of time-saving 7 times is selected and the remaining number of small hits is 1 at the time of transition to (during the rush battle mode described later) Refer to It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 2 for normal time saving.

FIG. 22(a) shows that 55 times, 95 times, or 496 times are selected as the number of times of time reduction (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time reduction game state, and the remaining number of small hits is 1 time. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for normal time reduction that is referred to when executing the variable display before the final time reduction (during the boisterous dance mode described later), and FIG. When 55 times, 95 times, or 496 times are selected as the number of times of time reduction (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to , and the remaining number of small hits is 1 time, the final time of time reduction is displayed. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 4 for normal time reduction to be referred to (during a wild dance mode described later).

FIG. 23(a) shows that 95 times is selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of the second special symbol when shifting to the normal time saving game state, and the remaining number of small hits is 2 times than the last time of time saving. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 5 for normal time reduction that is referred to when performing the previous variation display (during the super wild dance mode described later), and FIG. 2 When 95 times is selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of special symbols and the remaining number of small hits is 2 times, when executing the variable display of the last time of time saving (during the super wild dance mode described later) It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 6 for normal working hours reduction.

FIG. 24(a) shows that 496 times is selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time saving game state, and the remaining number of small hits is 2 times than the last time of time saving. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 7 for normal time reduction that is referred to when performing the previous variation display (during infinite mode described later), and FIG. When 496 times is selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of special symbols and the remaining number of small hits is 2 times, when the variable display of the last time of time saving is executed (during infinite mode described later) Normal referred to It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 8 for time saving.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for special time saving)
FIG. 25 is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for normal time reduction which is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the special time reduction gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 25(a) is a special time-saving game state when there is no big hit history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is big hit history information and the number of small hits remaining is 2 times. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for special time reduction which is referred to when executing the second or subsequent variation display from the start of the special time reduction gaming state (during infinite mode described later), FIG. (b) is a special time-saving game state, and when the main RAM 110c has jackpot history information and the number of small wins remaining is 2, the first variable display of time-saving is executed (during infinite mode). It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for normal working hours reduction, and FIG. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for special time saving to be referred to during a boisterous dance mode described later.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 25, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port) that performs variable display, the determination result of the big hit determination, and the determination result of the special symbol (stop special symbol data ), the random number for reach determination, the first reservation number (U1) or the second reservation number (U2), the random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, the special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, and the special design It is associated with variable time, and the content of the variable performance is described as a reference.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify at least the type of special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, although the details will be described later, since the big winning game and the small winning game are executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the big winning game and the small winning game can be specified. In addition, since the number of times of the time-saving game state (number of times of time-saving) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of times of time-saving can be specified.

As the production contents shown in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. , means to stop without reaching.

In addition, "ready-to-win" means that the player expects that a jackpot game will be executed in which some of the combinations of the performance symbols 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that causes For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for reporting a big win, the same performance symbols 70a are set to "7" in the left and right areas. is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a swings slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

"Normal reach" means a reach performance in which the same performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. reach. In the present embodiment, the "normal reach" does not give a big hit, but the "normal reach" may give a big win.

In addition, "SP reach" is performed after normal reach, and is a super reach effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than normal reach.

Also, "SPSP reach" is a special reach performance which is performed after normal reach or after super reach and has a higher expectation of a big win than super reach. For example, the three production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to produce a more special production than "SP reach".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that is performed after normal reach or after super reach and at which a big hit is determined. For example, from the blackout effect, the three effect patterns 70a are all the same and are changed at a low speed, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a more special effect than "SPSP reach". ing.

In addition, the “resurrection long variation” is an effect that makes it look like it will shift to the normal game state and makes a big hit. For example, almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special effect.

In addition, the “revival variation” is an effect that gives a small hit while pretending to shift to the normal game state. For example, a special effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device over a period of time shorter than the recovery long variation.

In addition, "rush battle reach" means whether or not a ally character and an enemy character battle and enter a wild dance mode, a super wild dance mode, or an infinite mode described later (either a loss, a big hit, or a small hit). ) has become a reach production that agitates. The modes are advantageous to the player in the order of wild dance mode<super wild dance mode<infinite mode.

In addition, the "final battle reach" means whether or not the ally character and the enemy character perform the final battle and enter a wild dance mode, a super wild dance mode, or an infinite mode described later (losing, big hit, small hit, and so on). It is a reach production that inspires.

In addition, "promotion battle reach" means whether a ally character and an enemy character battle and are promoted from a wild dance mode, which will be described later, to a super wild dance mode or an infinite mode (losing, big hit, or small hit). ) has become a reach production that agitates.

Further, the “promotion battle inciting change” is an effect in which a battle is not carried out after inciting whether or not the ally character and the enemy character will battle.

“Result fluctuation” is the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues with the jackpot game from the normal game state, which is called the so-called first hit, in the final variable display of the normal time-saving game state. It is an effect that the result display to be displayed is performed. It should be noted that the results may be displayed during a series of advantageous periods during which the player continues to be in an advantageous state, rather than from the first win.

"Result resurrection fluctuation" means that in the final fluctuation display of the normal time-saving game state, after the above-mentioned result display is performed, the resurrection display that suggests that the result is advantageous to the player (jackpot or small win) It is a production that will be performed.

"Continuous battle reach" is a reach that fuels whether or not the super wild dance mode or infinite mode described later will continue (either a loss, a big hit, or a small hit) by having a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. It is a performance.

"Undefeated Battle Reach" is a reach effect that suggests that a friendly character and an enemy character battle, but the friendly character always wins and the result is advantageous to the player (big win or small win). .

“Undefeated battle instigation change” is an effect in which a battle is not carried out after the ally character and the enemy character instigate whether or not they will battle.

"(Rush production) long fluctuation" is, if it is the first fluctuation of the special time-saving gaming state, it is a production that will be lost after the rush production that suggests entering the special time-saving gaming state is performed, and the special time-saving If the game state is not changed for the first time (it is changed for the second and subsequent times), the rush effect is not performed and the effect is lost.

"(Rush production) Immediate hit fluctuation" means that if it is the first fluctuation of the special time-saving gaming state, the player does not go through the reach after the rush production that suggests entering the special time-saving gaming state is performed. It is an effect that is notified that it is an advantageous result (jackpot or small win), and if it is not the first change in the special time-saving game state (the second and subsequent change display), the rush effect is not performed. It is an effect that notifies the player that the result (big win or small win) will be advantageous to the player without going through the reach.

"(Rush effect) undefeated battle reach" means that if it is the first change in the special time-saving game state, the above-mentioned undefeated battle reach is performed after a rush effect that suggests entering the special time-saving game state is performed. It is a reach performance.

The “plunge effect long variation” is an effect that becomes a loss after a rush effect that suggests entering a special time-saving gaming state is performed.

“Rush effect immediate hit fluctuation” means that the result (jackpot or small hit) that is advantageous to the player without going through the reach after the rush effect that suggests entering a special time-saving gaming state is performed. It is a production that will be done.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that during the variation display that is the final round of the normal time-saving gaming state (series of advantageous periods), there is a variation effect in which the result display is performed. There are points to be executed. By doing so, the player can confirm the result of the game during the series of advantageous periods, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that during the variation display that is the final round of the special time saving game state, a special effect is performed without result display. is mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction of the player from increasing due to the display of the game results in the series of advantageous periods even though the big winning game is not being executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be improved.

The third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used in the normal time saving game state and the special time saving game state. By doing so, even in the same time-saving game state, the performance contents of the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state can be made different, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As the fourth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25, in the initial variation in the special time saving game state, the special figure variation pattern determination table that differs depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear) The point is that it is being used. By doing so, it is possible to change the content of the effect during the first variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a history of big wins, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The point is that the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for special time saving) is used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data volume, realize efficient control, and shorten the development period.

As the sixth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25, when it becomes a jackpot during a special time-saving game state than when it becomes a jackpot during a normal game state, a short fluctuation The point is that the time variation pattern (instant hit variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed) is easily determined. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player in a situation where a big win game that causes a special time-saving game state is not executed for a long period of time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the seventh feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25, the case of becoming a jackpot during a special time-saving gaming state is shorter than the case of a jackpot during a normal time-saving gaming state. The point is that the variation pattern of the variation time (immediate hit variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed) is easily determined. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player in a situation where a big win game that causes a special time-saving game state is not executed for a long period of time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the eighth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25, the variation display is performed during the special time-saving gaming state than when the variation display is performed during the normal time-saving gaming state. The point is that the average fluctuation time is shorter in the case. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player in a situation where a big win game that causes a special time-saving game state is not executed for a long period of time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the normal time-saving gaming state and during the special time-saving gaming state different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used, but for example, when performing variation display other than the initial variation and final variation in the special time-saving gaming state Is a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal time reduction (for example, special figure variation pattern determination table 3 for normal time reduction, or special figure variation pattern determination table 5 for normal time reduction, or special figure variation for normal time reduction pattern determination table 7, etc.) may be used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data volume, realize efficient control, and shorten the development period.

In addition, in the first variation during the special time-saving gaming state, different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear), but the same special figure variation pattern determination table (for example, special time-saving Special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for or special figure variation pattern determination table 2) for special time saving may be used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data volume, realize efficient control, and shorten the development period.

In addition, in the final variation in the special time-saving gaming state, the same special figure variation pattern determination table is used regardless of the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear), but different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used. can be By doing so, it is possible to change the effect contents during the final variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a history of big wins, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Advance judgment table)
FIG. 26 is a pre-determination table referred to when pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port.

As shown in FIG. 26, the preliminary determination table contains the game state, the type of special symbol (starting port), the determination result of the big hit determination (random number for judging the big hit), and the determination result of the special symbol (special symbol determination). Random number for use), random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination, and special figure scheduled variation pattern as a determination result are associated.

Therefore, "special figure scheduled variation pattern" and "prefetch information" can be said to be capable of specifying at least the type of special symbol, the judgment result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed. . In addition, although the details will be described later, since the big winning game and the small winning game are executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the big winning game and the small winning game can be specified. In addition, since the number of times of the time-saving game state (number of times of time-saving) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of times of time-saving can be specified.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-described special figure variation pattern determination process has elapsed. When the variation time has passed, the process is moved to step S320-2, and when the variation time has not passed, the special symbol variation process of this time is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stop-displays the special symbol that has been determined in the above-described big win determination process, and in step S320-3 sets a stop time corresponding to the game situation in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, 8.0 seconds is set if it is the variable display of the final round of the time saving game state, and 0.5 seconds is set if it is other variable display.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c in step S320-4. If the time saving flag is set, the remaining time saving times are updated, and the process moves to step S320-5, and if the time saving flag is not set, the remaining time saving times are not updated. The process moves to S320-13.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current special symbol variable display is the first special symbol. In the case of the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first time saving number of times (J1), which is the number of times of saving time of the first special symbol saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the first special The third time saving number (J3), which is the number of times of saving time for the sum of the symbol and the second special symbol, is subtracted by 1, and if it is not the first special symbol (it is the second special symbol), in step S320-7, the main The second time saving frequency (J2), which is the time saving frequency of the second special symbols saved in the game RWM area of the RAM 110c, and the above-described third time saving frequency (J3) are subtracted by one.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S320-8 whether or not any one of the first number of times of time saving (J1), the number of times of second time saving (J2), and the number of times of saving time (J3) has become "0". When it becomes "0", the process moves to step S320-12 assuming that the time saving game state is terminated, and when it does not become "0", the process moves to step S320-9.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small winning special symbol is stopped. If it is not a small hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S320-13, and if it is a small hit special symbol, in step S320-10, until the time saving game state saved in the game RWM area is ended. Subtract 1 from the remaining number of small hits (Z).

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of remaining small wins has reached "0". When the remaining number of small hits is "0", the processing is shifted to step S320-12 assuming that the time saving game state is terminated, and when the remaining number of small hits is not "0", step S320. -13 is processed.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a clears the time saving flag and various times of time saving (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the time saving game state.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special jackpot symbol is stopped. If it is not a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S320-15, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, in step S320-14, the time saving flag and various times of time saving saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c (J1, J2, J3) are cleared to terminate the time-saving game state (start the normal game state). After completing this process, the process moves to step S320-19.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a sets the number of fluctuations saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c to the prescribed number of times (496 times, which is the maximum number of times of time saving in the normal time saving game state + 4 remaining pending numbers). 500 times) is determined. When the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, the process is moved to step S320-16 assuming that the special time-saving gaming state is started, and when the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number of times, the special time-saving gaming state is started. The process proceeds to step S320-18 assuming that it is not allowed.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a saves the special time saving number of times (J1=60, J2=750, J3=750) and the remaining number of small hits (Z=2) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. , In step S320-17, a special time-saving flag is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c to shift to a special time-saving gaming state.

In step S320-18, the main CPU 110a stores time-saving count designation commands corresponding to the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c into the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. As a result, the command for specifying the number of times of shortening of working hours is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the remaining number of times of shortening of hours is notified.

In step S320-19, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "2", and sends a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state (the game state specified by the presence or absence of the time saving flag) to the main RAM 110c. Set in the performance transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the game state is performed in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When this process is finished, the special symbol variation process of this time is finished.

In this way, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed (a small winning game is executed) during the time saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 47, the number of times of time saving (J1, J2, Even if J3) remains, the time-saving game state is terminated when the remaining number of small hits (Z) becomes "0". Therefore, it is possible for the player to proceed with the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effect or the combination of the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a (whether or not to aim for an advantageous big hit by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small winning game). ), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the game method during the time-saving game state, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even if the small hit remaining number of times (Z) remains, the time saving number of times (any of J1, J2, J3) becomes "0" so that the time saving game state ends. there is Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous due to the continuation of the time-saving game state until the small winning symbols are stop-displayed, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the number of times of fluctuation display of special symbols executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RWM clear, 0 clearing of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) reaches the specified number of times, a special time-saving game state is generated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the unexpectedness that the time-saving state occurs without going through the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations in which the special time-saving game state occurs (500 times) is a value larger than the maximum number of time-saving times (496 times) set in the normal time-saving game state, so during the normal time-saving game state Since the special time-saving game state does not occur, the inconvenience that the player cannot understand the progress of the game does not occur, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the number of fluctuations (500 times) in which the special time-saving gaming state occurs is greater than the maximum number of times of time-saving (496 times) set in the normal time-saving gaming state by the upper limit number (4) of the second pending number. By doing so, if the maximum number of times of time saving (496 times) is set in the normal time saving game state, it can be made to feel as if the normal time saving game state has shifted to the special time saving game state as it is. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the special time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to 0. Therefore, during the jackpot game (after the special time-saving game state has started or ended), the special time-saving game state will not occur again, and the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side can be secured. It is also possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of setting the maximum number of times of time saving in the normal time saving game state (496 times) to be less than the number of fluctuations (500 times) in which the special time saving game state occurs, the maximum number of times of time saving in the normal time saving game state And it is good also as the same number of times as the number of fluctuations in which the special time-saving gaming state occurs. In this way, the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state are seamlessly connected, and it is possible to make the player feel as if the normal time-saving game state has been extended, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. .

In addition, when the special time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and a special time-saving occurrence flag indicating that the special time-saving gaming state has occurred is set in the main RAM 110c (for gaming RWM). In this case, if there is no special time saving flag when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (500 times), the number of times of fluctuation is cleared to 0 to generate a special time saving gaming state, and if there is a special time saving flag, It is preferable not to generate a special time-saving game state by clearing the number of fluctuations to 0.

(Special symbol stop processing of the main control board)
The special symbol stop processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time set in the above-described special symbol variation process has elapsed. When the stop time has passed, the process is moved to step S330-2, and when the stop time has not passed, the special symbol stop process of this time is ended.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special jackpot symbol is stopped. If it is a big hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-3, and if it is not a big hit special symbol (it is a small hit special symbol or a losing special symbol), the process is moved to step S330-5.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a generates a jackpot according to the stop special pattern data (jackpot special pattern) from the jackpot game jackpot control data determination table (see FIG. 29(a)) for executing the jackpot game. A jackpot opening transition process such as selecting game control data (maximum number of round games played, maximum winning number, opening time, etc.) "3" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8. The details of the big winning opening control data determination table for the big winning game will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small winning special symbol is stopped. If it is a small winning special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-6, and if it is not a small winning special symbol (it is a losing special symbol), the process is moved to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a changes the stop special symbol data (small winning special symbol) from the large winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game for executing the small winning game (see FIG. 29(b)). Small winning opening transition processing such as selecting control data (maximum number of prizes, opening time, etc.) of small winning game is performed according to "4" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the selected control data in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-9 stores the opening designation command in the main RAM 110c as transmission data for effect. Set to area. As a result, the opening specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the opening effect of the big winning game or the small winning game is performed. When this process is finished, the special symbol stop process of this time is ended.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to shift the process to the special symbol storage determination process, and terminates the current special symbol stop processing.

(control data table)
FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing a big winning opening control data determination table for a big winning game for controlling a big winning opening during a big winning game (special game), and FIG. 29(b) shows a small winning game. It is a diagram showing a large winning opening control data determination table for a small winning game for controlling a large winning opening inside, and FIG. 29 (c) is a small winning game for controlling a specific area during a small winning game FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific area control data determination table for the .

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the big winning opening control data determination table for the big winning game includes stop special figure data of special symbols, the maximum number of round games in the big winning game, and the big winning opening in one round game. The maximum number of prizes to be won, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the type of the big prize opening to be opened in each round game, and the maximum opening of the big prize opening to be opened in each round game The number of times, the opening time of the large winning opening for one opening of each round game, and the interval time during which the large winning opening is closed after the end of the round game (to discharge the game balls from the large winning opening required time) is associated with the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game.

When the stop special figure data is "01", the first jackpot game in which the round game is performed three times is executed, and when the stop special figure data is "02", the round game is performed three times. At the same time, the second jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game, and when the stop special figure data is "03", three round games are performed. , a third jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first jackpot game.

Further, when the stop special figure data is "11", 10 round games are performed, and the fourth jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game. , When the stop special figure data is "12", 10 round games are played, and the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (same advantage as the fourth jackpot game) degree) to execute the fifth jackpot game.

In addition, when the stop special figure data is "13", the 1st V jackpot game in which the remaining two round games are performed via the first small hit game which is the first round game is executed, and the stop special When the figure data is "14", the remaining nine round games are performed via the second small winning game which is the first round game, and the second round game is more advantageous to the player than the first V big winning game. When the 2V jackpot game is executed and the stop special figure data is "15", the remaining two round games are performed via the third small hit game which is the first round game, and the 1st V jackpot. To execute a 3rd V jackpot game in which the state of the jackpot game can be more disadvantageous to a player than the game.

As a feature of the big winning opening control data determination table for the big winning game shown in FIG. , While the jackpot game of the maximum round (10 rounds) is not executed, when the jackpot game (4th to 5th jackpot games) based on the winning to the second start port 47 is executed, the maximum round (10 rounds) One of the points is that a jackpot game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the game characteristics when the game ball wins in the first start port 45 and when the game ball wins in the second start port 47, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), the large winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game includes the stop special figure data of the special symbol (kind of the small winning game) and the large winning opening to be opened in the small winning game. The maximum number of times of opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning mouth in the small winning game, the opening time until the big winning mouth is converted to the open state, the type of the big winning mouth to be opened, and for one opening The opening time of all the big winning mouths, the interval time when the big winning mouth is closed (the time required to discharge the game ball from the big winning mouth), and the small winning game from the last closing of the big winning mouth Ending time until completion is associated.

When the stop special figure data is "13", the first small winning game is executed, and when the stop special figure data is "14", the second small winning game is executed, and the stop special figure data is " 15", the third small winning game is executed.

As a feature of the large winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game shown in FIG. It is set to the time during which the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 (the interval time is 0.82 seconds with respect to the shooting interval of 0.67 seconds). By doing so, the opening time of the first large winning opening 50 can be shortened, and the first large winning opening can be opened within the predetermined maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small winning game. It is possible to increase the number of openings of the winning openings and improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 29 (c), the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game includes the stop special figure data of the special symbol (kind of the small winning game) and the specific area 53 to be opened in the small winning game. The maximum number of times of opening, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53 are associated with each other.

In the small winning game, regardless of the kind of the small winning game, the specific area 53 is changed to the open state when the big winning opening is opened in the small winning game, and the specific area 53 is changed to the closed state when the big winning opening is closed.

As a feature of the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game shown in FIG. 29(c), the probability of the game ball winning the first big winning hole 50 during the small winning game is almost 100% (1/1) The point is that the opening/closing timing of the specific region 53 is set so that the specific region 53 is passed through at . By doing so, the player can complete the small winning game with peace of mind, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that wins the first big prize hole 50 during the small winning game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1), The specific region 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

In addition, depending on the type of small winning game, when the specific area 53 is opened and closed so that the game ball that has won the first big winning hole 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1) (for example, the 2 small winning game), and when the specific area 53 is opened and closed so that the game ball that has won the first big winning hole 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of 25% (1/4) (for example, the third small winning game) may be provided.

(Jackpot game processing on the main control board)
The jackpot game processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the jackpot game processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the set opening time set in the above-described special symbol stop processing is "0" or more. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S340-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the above special symbol stop processing has passed. When the opening time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-3, and when the opening time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the in-round flag indicating that the round game is in progress is set to the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. set to

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games played (R) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, the round specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the round effect corresponding to the current round game is performed.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a round game is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-round flag is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the round game is being played, the process moves to step S340-6, and if the round game is not being played, the process moves to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time elapsed from the start of the current round game has reached the opening timing of the big winning opening specified by the control data of the big winning game. If the conditions for opening the big winning opening are satisfied, the process moves to step S340-7, and if the opening conditions for the big winning opening are not satisfied, the process moves to step S340-8.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the type of the big winning opening to be opened from the control data of the jackpot game (first big winning opening 50 or second big winning opening 56), and the big winning opening this time (first big winning opening 50 or The opening time of the second big winning opening 56) is specified, and the opening time of the big winning opening and the driving data of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid (first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are set as the main It is set in the game RWM area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening of the current big winning opening is before the final opening in the current round game and the opening time has passed. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-9, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-10.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 50 or second big winning opening 56) is specified from the control data of the big winning game, and the interval time (closing time) of the big winning opening is specified. time) is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the drive data for the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the conditions for shifting to the interval are met. Specifically, the number of game balls that have won the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth 50 or second big winning mouth 56) in this round game has reached the maximum winning number, or the number of big winning mouths in this round game It is determined whether or not the opening time of the final opening has passed. When the condition for shifting to the interval is established, the process is moved to step S340-11, and when the condition for shifting to the interval is not established, the current jackpot game processing is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs interval transition processing in step S340-11. Specifically, the current interval time (closing time of the big winning opening) is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, the interval time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the big winning set in the main RAM 110c is set. Clear the driving data of the solenoid. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state. Also, instead of the in-round flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an in-interval flag indicating that the interval is in progress is set. When the interval shift processing ends, the current jackpot game processing ends.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the interval is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is during the interval, the process moves to step S340-13, and if it is not during the interval, the process moves to step S340-19.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed in step S340-13. When the interval time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-14, and when the interval time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round game in the current jackpot game has ended. If the final round game has ended, the process moves to step S340-17, and if the final round game has not ended, the process moves to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-15. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, instead of the interval flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, the round game flag is set.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games played (R) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, the round specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the round effect corresponding to the current round game is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S340-17. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, instead of the interval flag stored in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, an ending flag indicating that the game is ending is set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending specifying command indicating the ending of the jackpot game in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the jackpot game processing of this time. As a result, the ending specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for executing the ending effect corresponding to the big hit game of this time is performed.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is during the ending, the process is moved to step S340-20, and if it is not during the ending, this jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-20 whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not passed, this jackpot game process is terminated, and if the ending time has passed, in step S340-21, special figure special electric processing data for moving the process to the jackpot game end process is set to "5", and the current jackpot game processing is terminated.

(Small winning game processing of the main control board)
The small winning game processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing small winning game end processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is "0" or more. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S350-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the above special symbol stop processing has passed. When the opening time has passed, in step S350-3, an opening/closing game flag indicating that the opening/closing game for opening/closing the big winning opening is in progress is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the opening time has passed. If not, the small winning game processing of this time is terminated.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening/closing game of the big winning opening is in progress. If the opening/closing game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-5, and if the opening/closing game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big winning slot is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening of the small winning game or the interval has ended. If the condition for opening the big winning opening is met, the process moves to step S350-6, and if the opening condition for the big winning opening is not met, the process moves to step S350-7.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the type of large winning opening to be opened from the control data of the small winning game shown in FIG. 10 (c) (first large winning opening 50 or second large winning opening 56) The opening time of the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56) is specified, and the opening time of the big winning hole and the big winning hole opening/closing solenoid (first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b or second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b) is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the open state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the specific area 53 specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. If the condition for opening the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-8, and if the condition for opening the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area release processing in step S350-8. Specifically, the driving data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted to the open state.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for closing the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is time to close the specific area 53 specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. If the condition for closing the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-10, and if the condition for closing the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area closing processing in step S350-10. Specifically, the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted to the closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has passed, and whether or not the number of winnings to the large winning opening has reached the maximum number of winnings. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process is moved to step S350-12, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process is moved to step S350-13.

In step S350-12, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) is specified from the control data of the small winning game shown in FIG. The drive data for the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid set in the game RWM area of the RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final interval time in the small winning game has elapsed. When the final interval time has passed, in step S350-14, the open/close playing flag set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared, and when the final interval time has not passed, The small winning game processing of this time is ended.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the specific area passage flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the specific area passage flag is saved, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the open/close game, and the process is shifted to step S350-16 assuming that the jackpot game is executed, and the specific area passage flag is saved. If not, the process proceeds to step S350-19 assuming that the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the open/close game to execute the ending.

The main CPU 110a clears the specific area passage flag saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S350-16, and performs jackpot game transition processing in step S350-17. Specifically, control data (maximum number of round games, maximum winning number, Opening time etc.) is selected, and processing such as clearing the time saving flag and various times of time saving (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is performed.

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" in order to shift the processing to the big winning game processing, and ends the current small winning game processing.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S350-19. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the small winning game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating the ending of the small winning game in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small winning game processing. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the game ball is placed in the specific area 53 in the ending effect (during the small winning game, more specifically during the opening and closing game) according to the small winning game this time. A disappointing notification effect, etc., for notifying that the road did not pass through) is executed.

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 is "0" or more. If it is during the ending, the process is moved to step S350-22, and if it is not during the ending, this small winning game process is terminated.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 has elapsed. When the ending time has not passed, the small hit game process of this time is terminated, and when the ending time has passed, in step S350-23, a special figure special electric call is sent to move the process to the special symbol storage determination process. After setting "0" to the processing data, the current small winning game processing is terminated.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the small winning game (conversion game) ends (10 times opening of the first big winning opening or winning of 10 game balls) The jackpot game is not executed until the game is played. Therefore, the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 does not put the player at a disadvantage, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the big winning game is executed without ending the small winning game. Therefore, the period from the small win game to the big win game is not prolonged, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, you may make it perform a big-hit game after performing the ending of a small-hit game.

(Jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 110a acquires the stop special figure data saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-2, whether or not the stop special figure data is a jackpot special symbol. determine whether If it is a big hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S360-3, and if it is not a big hit special symbol (it is a small hit special symbol), the process is moved to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the game state information when winning the jackpot saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. The first game state setting table (see FIG. 33(a)) for setting the game state is selected, and the process proceeds to step S360-7. The details of the first game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the specific area passing game state information saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. The second game state setting table (see FIG. 33(b)) for setting the game state after the game is selected, and the process proceeds to step S360-7. The details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a collates the acquired game state information and the like with the selected game state setting table, and sets the game state flag, the number of time reductions (J1 to J3), and the small game state as the game state after the jackpot game. The number of hits remaining (Z) is determined and set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8, a game state designation command corresponding to the game state flag is set in the performance transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the game state is performed in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing, and terminates the current jackpot game end processing.

Thus, at the end of the big winning game executed by the game ball passing through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, based on the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, A predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the jackpot game (game state, the number of time reductions, the number of remaining small wins), or setting the determined game conditions in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c ) can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform game control (setting of game conditions) by making use of events that actually occur in the game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, at the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the jackpot game, based on the game state when it is determined to be a jackpot, a predetermined process (specifically, the game conditions after the jackpot game (game state, time saving number, small It is possible to perform a process of determining the remaining number of hits) and setting the determined game conditions in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, the game performance can be differentiated depending on whether it is a big winning game via a small winning game or a big winning game not via a small winning game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, at the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the small hit game, the predetermined processing is not performed based on the game state when it is determined to be a jackpot, but based on the game state when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. Predetermined processing may be performed.

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 33(a) is a diagram showing a first game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the small hit, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a second game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the first game state setting table includes stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, jackpot winning game state information indicating the game state at the time of jackpot winning, and game state to be set. A flag (a time-saving flag indicating that it is a time-saving game state), a first time-saving number (J1) that is the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol that ends the time-saving game state, and a second special that ends the time-saving game state The second time-saving number of times (J2), which is the number of times of variable display of the symbol, and the third time-saving number of times (J3), which is the number of times of variable display of the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to end the time-saving gaming state, It is associated with the remaining number of small hits (Z), which is the number of times of the small hit variation display that ends the time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), in the second game state setting table, there are stop special symbol data of a small hit special symbol, and a game state at the time of passage of a specific area 53 indicating the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53. Information, the set game state flag (time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving game state), the first time saving number (J1) which is the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol that ends the time saving game state, and time saving The second time-saving number of times (J2), which is the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol that ends the gaming state, and the number of times of variable display of the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that ends the time-saving gaming state. The number of times of 3 o'clock reduction (J3) is associated with the remaining number of times of small hits (Z) which is the number of times of the small hit variation display to end the time saving game state.

As the first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33, it is set when executed in the time saving game state than the second time saving number of times (J2) set when it is executed in the normal game state The point is that there is a jackpot game (first jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the number of second time saving times (J2) increases. By doing so, it is possible to vary the second time reduction frequency (J2) set according to the type of the jackpot game, thereby improving the game performance and enhancing the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. There is a jackpot game (2nd jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) that is the same as the 2nd time reduction number of times (J2), and the second time reduction number of times (J2) of the jackpot game is the other jackpot game (No. 1 jackpot game, 3rd jackpot game) is higher than the second time reduction frequency (J2). By doing so, the value of the jackpot game can be changed by the number of time reductions instead of the difference due to the prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the game and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

As a third feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33, it is set when it is executed in the time saving game state than the small hit remaining number (Z) set when it is executed in the normal game state The point is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the number of remaining small hits (Z) increases. By doing so, it is possible to vary the number of remaining small wins (Z) set depending on the type of the big win game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by improving the game performance.

As the fourth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33, the small hit remaining number (Z) set when executed in the normal game state, There are jackpot games (4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) that are the same as the number of hits remaining (Z), and in the normal game state, the remaining number of hits (Z) of the jackpot game is the same as the other jackpot game (4th jackpot game). 1 jackpot game, 2nd jackpot game, 3rd jackpot game) is larger than the number of remaining small hits (Z). By doing this, the value of the big win game can be changed not by the difference due to the prize balls that can be obtained during the big win game, but by the number of remaining small wins, and the amusement of the game is improved by improving the playability. becomes possible.

As the fifth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33, the second time saving number of times (J2) that is set when the game is executed in the normal game state in the jackpot game that is executed via the small game There is a jackpot game (1st V jackpot game, 3rd V jackpot game) in which the second time saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the time saving game state is larger than that. By doing so, it is possible to vary the second time reduction frequency (J2) set according to the type of the big winning game via the small winning game, improve the game performance and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

As a sixth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33, the jackpot game executed via the small hit game is set to the small hit remaining number of times (Z) when executed in the normal game state. Also, there is a point that the number of remaining small hits (Z) set when executed in the time saving game state is larger. By doing so, it is possible to vary the value of the big winning game via the small winning game depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the game performance and the amusement of the game.

(Game state referred to at the end of the jackpot game not via the jackpot game)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a game state referred to at the end of a big win game that does not go through a small win game, and FIG. 34(a) is a timing chart when the big win variation display is executed in the normal game state. , FIG. 34(b) is a timing chart when the big hit variation display is executed in the time saving game state (before the final change), and FIG. 34(c) shows the big hit change display in the time saving game state (final change). It is a timing chart when it is executed.

Regarding the game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, time saving number of times, remaining number of small hits) at the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the jackpot game, the timing when it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot judgment (when the jackpot is won ).

As shown in FIG. 34(a), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the T4 jackpot game, at the start of the T1 jackpot variation display, that is, when the jackpot is won. The game conditions (game state, various time saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state in . In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), when the big hit variation display is executed in the time saving game state (before the final variation), at the end of the T4 jackpot game, at the start of the T1 jackpot variation display, that is, The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, small win remaining times) are set with reference to the game state at the timing of winning the jackpot. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (final variation), at the end of the T4 jackpot game, at the start of the T1 jackpot variation display, that is, the jackpot The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state at the timing of winning. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

(Game state referred to at the end of the jackpot game via the small win game)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a game state referred to at the end of a jackpot game via a small win game, and FIG. 35(a) is a timing chart when a small hit variation display is executed in a normal game state. There is, FIG. 35 (b) is a timing chart when the small winning variation display is executed so that the time saving end condition is not satisfied in the time saving game state, and FIG. 34 (c) is the time saving end condition satisfied in the time saving game state It is a timing chart when the small hit variation display is executed.

Regarding the game state referred to in order to set the game conditions (game state, time saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) at the end of the jackpot game via the small win game, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small win game. It is the timing (at the time of transition to the jackpot game) when it is done.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), when the small hit variation display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the T6 big win game, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the T4 small win game. The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state at the time of doing. In this case, since the normal game state is maintained from the start of the small winning variation display, the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 35(b), when the small hit variation display that does not satisfy the time saving end condition in the time saving game state is executed, at the end of the T6 big win game, the game ball during the T4 small win game The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state when passes through the specific region 53 . In this case, since the time-saving game state is maintained without the various time-saving times and the remaining number of small wins becoming "0" when the stop display of the small hit variation display of T2 is displayed, the timing of T4 is called the time-saving game state. It will be. When the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, the jackpot game is started and the normal game state is entered. It is supposed to be.

As shown in FIG. 35 (c), when the small hit variation display that satisfies the time saving end condition in the time saving game state is executed, at the end of the T6 big win game, the game ball during the T4 small win game The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state when passes through the specific region 53 . In this case, at the time of the stop display of the small winning variation display at T2, one of the time saving times becomes "0" and the time saving game state ends and shifts to the normal game state, so the timing of T4 is called the normal game state. It will be.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, when the big winning variation display is executed and the big winning game is executed, and when the small winning variation display is executed and the big winning game is executed, at the end of the big winning game The sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the game state to be referred to for setting the game conditions (game state, various times of time saving, number of remaining small hits) is different. Therefore, it is possible to make the game different depending on whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Mode flow showing transition of game modes)
FIG. 36(a) is a mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in the normal game state, and FIG. 36(b) is a rush game mode or a boisterous dance mode (normal time-saving game state) in which the jackpot game is executed. FIG. 36(c) is a mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in the super wild dance mode or infinite mode (normal time-saving game state).

As shown in FIG. 36(a), in the normal game state, when it is determined as a big win (first result) in the big win determination relating to the first special symbol and the big win special symbol 01 is stop-displayed, three rounds are performed. A first jackpot game consisting of a game is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to one time to shift to a boisterous dance mode.
In addition, when the jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, the second jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the second jackpot game is executed. The number of times of shortening in two hours (J2) is set to 95 times, and the number of remaining small hits is set to 1 time.
In addition, when the jackpot determination relating to the first special pattern is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special pattern 03 is stopped and displayed, the third jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the third jackpot game is executed. The number of times of shortening two hours (J2) is set to 7 times, and the number of remaining small hits is set to 1 time, and the game shifts to a wild dance mode.

In addition, when it is determined as a big win (first result) in the big win determination related to the second special symbol and the big win special symbol 11 is stop-displayed, the fourth big win game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then the second special symbol is displayed. The number of times of 2 hour reduction (J2) is set to 496 times, and the number of remaining small hits is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.
In addition, when it is determined as a big win (first result) in the big win determination relating to the second special symbol and the big win special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the fifth big win game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then the second special symbol. The number of times of 2 hour reduction (J2) is set to 496 times, and the number of remaining small hits is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when a small winning (second result) is determined in the big winning determination related to the second special symbol and the small winning special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the first V big winning game consisting of three round games is executed, and then Then, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times, and the remaining number of small hits is set to 1 time.
Further, when it is determined as a small winning (second result) in the big winning determination related to the second special symbol and the small winning special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the second V big winning game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then Then, the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits is set to 1 time.
Further, when it is determined as a small winning (second result) in the big winning determination related to the second special symbol and the small winning special symbol 15 is stop-displayed, the 3rd V big winning game consisting of three round games is executed, and then Then, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times, and the remaining number of small hits is set to 1 time.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), in the rush battle mode or boisterous dance mode (normal time-saving game state) in which the remaining number of small hits is 1, the big hit is determined according to the first special symbol (first result ) and the jackpot special symbol 01 is stop-displayed, the first jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed without subtracting the remaining number of small hits (remaining one round), and then the second jackpot game. The number of times of shortening two hours (J2) is set to 95 times and the number of remaining small hits (Z) is set to 2 times.
In addition, when the jackpot determination related to the first special pattern is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special pattern 02 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 1 time) 3 times. After that, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is set to 2 times. do.
In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit (first result) in the big hit determination related to the first special pattern and the special big hit pattern 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 1 time) 3 times. After that, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is set to 2 times. do.

In addition, when it is determined as a big hit (first result) in the big hit determination related to the second special pattern and the big hit special pattern 11 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 1 time) 10 times. After that, the second time saving frequency (J2) is set to 496 times and the remaining number of small winnings is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.
In addition, when it is determined as a big hit (first result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the big hit special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 1 time) 10 times. After that, the second time saving frequency (J2) is set to 496 times and the remaining number of small winnings is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when the small winning (second result) is determined in the big winning determination relating to the second special symbol and the small winning special symbol 13 is stop-displayed, the remaining number of small winnings is subtracted to 0 to enter the normal game state. A first V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, after which the second number of times of shortening time (J2) is set to 55 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to one time to shift to a wild dance mode.
In addition, when it is determined as a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 0 and the normal game state is entered. A second V jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, after which the second number of times of shortening time (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of times of small wins is set to one time to shift to a boisterous dance mode.
In addition, when it is determined as a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 0 and the normal game state is entered. A 3rd V jackpot game consisting of 3 round games is executed, after which the second time saving frequency (J2) is set to 55 times and the rest of the small winning frequency is set to 1 time to shift to a boisterous dance mode.

As shown in FIG. 36 (c), in the super wild dance mode or infinite mode (normal time-saving game state) in which the number of remaining small hits is 2, the big hit is determined according to the first special (first result) When it is determined that the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed without subtracting the remaining number of small hits (remaining two times), and then the second jackpot game. The time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits (Z) is set to 2 times.
In addition, when the jackpot determination related to the first special pattern is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special pattern 02 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 2 times) 3 times. After that, the second jackpot game consisting of the round game is executed, and then the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits (Z) is set to 2 times. do.
In addition, when the jackpot determination related to the first special pattern is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special pattern 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 2 times) 3 times. After that, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is set to 2 times. do.

In addition, when it is determined as a big hit (first result) in the big hit determination related to the second special pattern and the big hit special pattern 11 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 2 times) 10 times. After that, the second time saving frequency (J2) is set to 496 times and the remaining number of small winnings is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.
In addition, when it is determined as a big hit (first result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the big hit special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 2 times) 10 times. After that, the second time saving frequency (J2) is set to 496 times and the remaining number of small winnings is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when it is determined as a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special pattern and the small hit special pattern 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is reduced to 1, but the normal time-saving game state is maintained. A super wild dance mode in which a first V jackpot game consisting of three round games is maintained and then set to 95 times (J2) and the remaining number of small hits is set to 2 times. transition to
In addition, when it is determined as a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special pattern and the small hit special pattern 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 1, but the normal time-saving game state is maintained. A super wild dance mode in which a second V jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is maintained and then set to 95 times (J2) and the remaining number of small hits is set to 2 times. transition to
In addition, when it is determined as a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special pattern and the small hit special pattern 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 1, but the normal time-saving game state is maintained. A super wild dance mode in which a third V jackpot game consisting of three round games is maintained and then set to 95 times (J2) and the remaining number of small hits is set to 2 times. transition to

Thus, as a result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol in the normal game state, when the third jackpot game (equivalent to the first special game) is executed, the second time-saving number of times (J2) is seven times The first jackpot game or second jackpot game (equivalent to the second special game) that is controlled to the normal time-saving game state (equivalent to the first specific game state) set to , and is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game When it is executed, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times or 95 times, which is more than 7 times. there is Therefore, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied depending on the type of the executed jackpot game (the jackpot special symbol displayed stopped), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, when the result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot (first result), the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) can be executed, and the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is a small win (second result), it is possible to execute a second V jackpot game (equivalent to a second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game, and is related to the second special symbol. When the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (first result), the fourth jackpot game or the fifth jackpot game (equivalent to the third special game), which is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game, can be executed. there is Therefore, it is possible to vary the type of the jackpot game depending on the type of the special symbol and the type of the determination result, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, after the second V jackpot game (equivalent to the second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (equivalent to the first special game) is executed, the boisterous mode or super-random mode (specific game state: normal time-saving game state), when it is determined as a jackpot (first result) as a result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, the fourth jackpot game or the second 5 jackpot game (equivalent to the third special game) can be executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit (second result) as a result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, the second V jackpot game (second special game) can be executed. Therefore, even if the big hit determination related to the same second special symbol is performed, the type of the big win game to be executed can be changed according to the type of the determination result, and the interest in the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the fourth jackpot game or fifth jackpot game (equivalent to the second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game (equivalent to the second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (equivalent to the first special game) In the infinite mode (specific game state: normal time-saving game state) controlled after the execution of the third special game), it was determined as a jackpot (first result) as a result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol. In the case, it is possible to execute the 4th jackpot game or the 5th jackpot game (equivalent to the 3rd special game), and when it is determined as a small hit (second result) as a result of the jackpot determination related to the 2nd special symbol , the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) can be executed. Therefore, even if the big hit determination related to the same second special symbol is performed, the type of the big win game to be executed can be changed according to the type of the determination result, and the interest in the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, in the state of rush battle mode or boisterous dance mode (normal time saving game state), when the jackpot special pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern and the jackpot game is executed, the game condition (second time saving Number of times, remaining number of small hits, production mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the jackpot game in the normal time-saving game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the state of rush battle mode (normal time-saving game state), the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and the passing of the game ball to the specific area 53 during the small winning game is a condition. When the jackpot game is executed, the game conditions (the second time reduction number of times, the number of remaining small wins, the production mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the small winning game in the normal time-saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in the state of the super wild dance mode (normal time-saving game state), when the jackpot special pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern and the jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot special pattern is executed as the second special pattern. is stopped and displayed, and when a jackpot game is executed with the condition that the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the game, the game conditions (the second time reduction number, the remaining number of small hits, the production mode, etc.) It is designed to be maintained without being ranked down. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is disappointed by the big win or the small win in the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in any game mode (normal game state, normal time saving game state), when the big hit special symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol and the big hit game is executed, the game condition (second time saving The number of times, the number of remaining small hits, the production mode, etc.) are set to be the highest rank in the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, the value of the big win in the second special symbol can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the jackpot special pattern is stopped and displayed as the second special pattern and the jackpot game is executed, the game conditions (the second time reduction number, the number of small hits remaining, the production mode, etc.) are set to the maximum regardless of the type of the jackpot game. For example, when the 4th jackpot special game is executed, the game condition is set to super wild dance mode, and when the 5th jackpot special game is executed, the game condition is set to infinite mode instead of being ranked higher. You may make it In this case, the ratio of execution of the fifth jackpot special game may be higher than the ratio of execution of the fourth jackpot special game, or vice versa.

(Public power control processing of the main control board)
Using FIG. 37, the normal/universal power control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the normal/universal power control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general electric power processing data, and in step S402, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded general electric power processing data, and executes the processing corresponding to the branch destination address. Execute and end the current general map general electric control processing.

Specifically, if the general pattern general electric processing data = 0, the processing for executing the fluctuation display of the normal pattern based on the reservation memory (the general pattern determination information) and the general pattern general electric processing data "1" A normal symbol variation process (step S410) for performing the process of changing to , etc. is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later.

If the general pattern general electric processing data = 1, the processing for executing the auxiliary game to open the second start port 47 in a predetermined manner and the processing for changing the general general electric processing data to "0", etc. The auxiliary game process (step S420) is executed.

(Normal pattern variation processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of normal symbols is being performed, the process is moved to step S410-12, and when the variable display of normal symbols is not being performed, the process is moved to step S410-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 1 or more in step S410-2. When the normal design reserved number (G) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S410-3, and when the normal design reserved number (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal design variation process is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates the normal symbol reserved number (G) by subtracting "1", and in step S410-4, shifts the data stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area. The normal pattern determination information stored in the 1 storage unit to the 4th storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. In addition, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The normal pattern determination information used in the previous game is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing in step S410-5. Specifically, using the hit determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 39 (a)), whether or not hit based on the random number value for hit determination stored in the game state and normal pattern execution storage area decide. The details of the hit determination table for normal symbol determination will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, using the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 39(b)), based on the game state, the hit determination result, and the random number value for normal symbol determination, the normal that is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display Determine the stop normal pattern data of the design. Details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the normal symbol type determined in the normal symbol determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the stop normal pattern data can be grasped in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

The main CPU 110a performs a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in step S410-8. Specifically, using the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 39 (c)), the game state, the hit determination result, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number value, based on the normal pattern for the fluctuation display Determine the variation pattern (variation time). In addition, the detail of a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table is mentioned later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal pattern variation pattern specification command corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern determined in the normal pattern variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the general pattern variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the general pattern variation pattern can be grasped in the production control board 130.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a sets the normal pattern variation time corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern determined in the normal pattern variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. The symbol variation display is started, and the normal symbol variation processing of this time is terminated. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the normal symbols is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and is output in the output control process of the step S800, so that the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device 62. will be displayed.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. When the variation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated, and when the variation time has elapsed, the variation display of the normal symbols is stopped in step S410-13, and in step S410-14. , set the normal symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (hitting winning). When it is not a winning normal design, this normal design variation process is ended, and when it is a winning normal design, in step S410-16, the auxiliary game is controlled from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 39 (d)). Acquire the auxiliary game control data for doing. The details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM. Thereby, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the opening of the auxiliary game is started in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

Main CPU110a, in step S410-18, sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in auxiliary game 410-16 in a predetermined area of the main RAM110c, in step S410-19, normal figure normal electric processing "1" is set in the data, and the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated.

(Hit determination table for normal symbols)
FIG. 39(a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols that is referred to when determining hit based on the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), in the hit determination table for normal symbols, the game state at the time of performing hit determination, the random number for hit determination, and the determination result of hit determination (hit or miss) correspond to each other. As a reference, the approximate winning probability is described in the rightmost column.

"Hit" is the determination result that the auxiliary game is executed, and "losing" is the determination result that the auxiliary game is not executed. In addition, the hit judgment is only lost, and no special loss (time saving) is set.

As the first feature of the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. The point is that the probability (percentage) of being determined to be hit is the same regardless of whether it is a time-saving game state.By doing this, it is expected that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 39(a) is that the set value does not change the hit probability and is constant. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the probability (percentage) that the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state is determined to be hit is higher than the non-time-saving state (normal game state) (generates a normal pattern probability change). In this case, the probability (percentage) of the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state are determined to be the same, and the special time-saving game state is better than the normal time-saving game state. The probability (percentage) to be determined may be higher, and the probability (percentage) to be determined as winning in the normal time-saving gaming state may be higher than in the special time-saving gaming state.

(Normal design judgment table)
FIG. 39(b) is a normal design determination table that is referred to when determining the stop design of the normal design based on the normal design determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal design gate 44. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 39(b), in the normal symbol determination table, the game state when the determination is performed, the determination result of the hit determination (hit, lose), the random number for the hit symbol determination, and the normal symbol determination. The determination result, the stop normal pattern data indicating the determination result, and the normal design specifying command indicating the result of the normal design determination are associated with each other.

The normal symbol "0" is a losing normal symbol in which the auxiliary game is not executed.
The normal symbol "1" is a winning normal symbol in which the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened once is executed.
The normal symbol "2" is a winning normal symbol in which the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened twice is executed.

A first feature of the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 39(b) is that two types of normal symbols are set for executing auxiliary games with different opening times of the second starting port 47. be done. By doing so, the playability of the auxiliary game can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second feature of the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 39(b) is that the selection ratio of normal symbols is constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 39(c) is a normal pattern variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the normal pattern variation pattern based on the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 39 (c), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the game state when making a judgment, the determination result of the hit determination, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number value, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination determination Fluctuation time to be the result, normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command indicating the determination result is associated.

As the first feature of the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Shorter working hours gaming state, special shorter working hours gaming state) relatively short fluctuation time is determined, that is, shorter working hours state is easier to determine than non-working time saving state. By doing so, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 47 in various time-saving gaming states than in the non-time-saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39(c) is that the selection ratio of each normal pattern fluctuation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to provide a fair game.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 39(d) is an auxiliary game control table used for controlling the auxiliary game based on the type of winning normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 39(d), in the auxiliary game control table, the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, stop normal diagram data, the number of times the second start port 47 is opened, and the opening time of the auxiliary game , the first opening time of the second starting port 47, the interval time between openings, the second opening time of the second starting port 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated.

As the first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 39 (d), various time-saving game states (normal time-saving game state, special The opening time of the second starting port 47 is longer when the auxiliary game is executed in the time saving game state). By doing so, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the second starting port 47 in various time-saving gaming states than in the non-time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 39 (d) is the performance of the auxiliary game in the normal time saving game state and the special time saving game state (opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 opens, the second start The point is that there is no difference in the time value for opening the mouth 47). By doing so, the player is advantageous in any time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when setting to generate a special time-saving game state during the normal time-saving game state, the performance of the time-saving state before and after is the same, so there is no need to perform complicated control, and the addition of pure time-saving times is realized. It becomes possible to

The third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 39 (d) is the performance of the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 opens, the time value that the second start port 47 opens ) is constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to find out the set value from the progress of the auxiliary game, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

In addition, depending on whether it is a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state, the performance of the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 opens, at least one of the time values that the second start port 47 opens ) may be different.

Also, depending on whether it is a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state, the performance of the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 is opened, at least one of the time value when the second start port 47 is opened 1), when the special time-saving game state overlaps with the normal time-saving game state, the performance of the auxiliary game in the normal time-saving game state may be taken over in the special time-saving game state.

(External information data creation process for main control board)
The external information data creation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing external information data creation processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S720-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. If there is no winning, the process proceeds to step S720-3, and if there is a winning, in step S720-2, the external information data of the starting opening winning signal indicating that the game ball has won the starting opening is sent. It is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable display of the special symbols has stopped. If the variable display is not stopped (in any of the variable display, customer waiting state, or jackpot game), the process proceeds to step S720-5, and if the variable display is stopped, step S720. At -4, the external information data of the symbol determination signal indicating that the variable display of the special symbols has stopped is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not a jackpot game has started in step S720-5. When the jackpot game is not started, the process is moved to step S720-7, and when the jackpot game is started, in step S720-6, an external special game signal indicating that the jackpot game state is in progress is generated. Information data is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game has ended. If the jackpot game has not ended, the process proceeds to step S720-9, and if the jackpot game has ended, in step S720-8, the special game set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c. Clear the external information data of the signal.

In step S720-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an advantageous state (including a jackpot game and a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state has started. If the advantageous state has not started, the process proceeds to step S720-11, and if the advantageous state has started, in step S720-10 an advantageous state signal indicating that the advantageous state is in progress is sent to the main RAM 110c. external information data output area.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-11 whether or not the advantageous state has ended. If the advantageous state has not ended, the process proceeds to step S720-13, and if the advantageous state has ended, in step S720-12, the advantageous state set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c. Clear the external information data of the signal.

In step S720-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 has started. If the frame opening has not started, the process proceeds to step S720-15, and if the frame opening has started, in step S720-14, the external information of the frame opening signal indicating that the frame is being opened. Data is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the frame opening has ended (the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are closed). If the frame opening has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S720-17. Clear the external information data of the signal.

In step S720-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear or security error (various abnormalities) has occurred. If the RWM clear or security error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S720-19, and if the RWM clear or security error has occurred, in step S720-18 it is determined that the RWM clear or security error has occurred. is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a payout condition for a predetermined unit (10 balls in this case) of prize balls is satisfied. If the payout condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S720-21, and if the payout condition is not satisfied, it is determined in step S720-20 that the payout condition for prize balls of a predetermined unit has been satisfied. The external information data of the shown prize ball schedule signal is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the payout of a predetermined unit (here, 10) of prize balls has been completed. If the payout of prize balls has not been completed, the current external information data creation processing is terminated. If the payout of prize balls has been completed, the payout of prize balls in a predetermined unit is completed in step S720-22. The external information data of the prize ball payout signal indicating that the game has been played is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c, and the current external information data creation processing is terminated.

Various types of external information data set in the external information data output area are output to the outside of the gaming machine 1 as game information from various terminals of the game information output terminal board by the output control process of step S750 described above. Become.

(Description of various signals output as game information)
FIG. 41 shows the types of various signals output as game information from various output terminals of the game information output terminal board 90, output timings of the various signals, and output periods of the various signals.

From the first terminal, when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a starting hole winning signal is output over 100ms.
From the second terminal, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol determination signal is output for 500 ms.
A special game signal is output from the third terminal from the start of the jackpot game to the continuation of the jackpot game.
An advantageous state signal is output from the fourth terminal from the start of the advantageous state to the continuation of the advantageous state.

From the fifth terminal, a frame opening signal is output from when the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is detected until the opening continues.
From the sixth terminal, a security signal is output for 200 ms from the occurrence of various abnormalities (RWM clear, fraudulent winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, payout abnormality).
From the seventh terminal, a scheduled payout signal is output for 100 ms from the time when the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is determined.
A payout completion signal is output from the eighth terminal for 100 ms after the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is completed.

Since the game information is output to the outside of the game machine 1 through the game information output terminal board 90 in this way, the operating state of the game machine 1 can be monitored and the performance can be monitored by an information collecting device such as a hall computer. It becomes possible to perform analysis and the like.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a displays the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and the process proceeds to step S850-2. , the process proceeds to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not changed. It should be noted that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a lighting confirmation completion flag for determining whether or not lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag has been saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and the process proceeds to step S850-4.If the lighting confirmed flag has not been saved, the information is displayed. The process moves to step S850-3 to check whether the device 113 is lit. When this process is executed for the first time after the game machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step S850-3, the main CPU 110a displays lighting confirmation display for lighting all the segments (including the decimal point) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage Acquire the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", obtain the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is obtained.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and displays information based on the section counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out number counter, and the acquired normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area in step S850-6. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 described above is referred to, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. will be The information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above display switching time counter in step S850-7, and determines whether or not the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 5 seconds) in step S850-8. If it is not greater than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S850-15. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has passed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-described lighting confirmed flag exists in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process proceeds to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, in step S850-11, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. .

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above data selection counter in step S850-12, and determines whether or not the data selection counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 3) in step S85-13. If it is not larger than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the above-described game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is restored, and the current performance display data setting process is terminated.

In this way, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is out of order and which segment is out of order.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare the performance information (usual base value) in two game sections, and it is possible to check the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraud.

(Information displayed on the information display in each game section)
Next, the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. In the display information table of FIG. 43, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL." indicating the normal base value of the current game interval, and " "b1.", "b2." indicating the normal base value of the game interval two times before, and "b3." indicating the normal base value of the game interval three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that the normal out count is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99" respectively, "01" to "99", and the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. When the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical segment does not change in display mode (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment does not change. The display mode changes (blinking display or lit display) depending on the number of outs during normal operation (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game intervals, when the identification information of the game interval for which there is no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is blinked. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will blink. Otherwise, the identification information is illuminated.

Here, to give an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 blinks "bL." ” will be lit up.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value If the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." .

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.), so 2 as a numerical segment An easy-to-understand display can be achieved by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

In addition, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of outs during normal of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient to calculate the normal base value. , the identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

Also, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "--" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that there is no

Instead of executing the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them are executed as game programs (for example, game ball counting process). The processing may be executed within the input control processing which monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remainder may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process, which is a game program.

Also, by the out ball detection switch 39a, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 56, and the out opening 39 Instead of detecting out-balls made up of game balls that have flowed into the outlet, only game balls that have flowed into the out-port may be detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a. In that case, out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening detection switch The number of outs (the number of total outs, the number of normal outs) should be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected at 56a.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change)
With reference to FIG. 44, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the game results The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At timing T1, when a setting change operation (setting key switch 112a turned on, RWM clear switch 111a turned on) is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 starts a setting change mode. It is in a pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting change notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set values displayed on the 7-segment display 113d are erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has passed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirming settings)
With reference to FIG. 45, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the game results The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned ON) when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before starting. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

The specific example from the timing T3 to the timing T10 is the same as the specific example from the timing T3 to the timing T10 in the case of initializing the various drive sources after the setting change shown in FIG. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, the specific area opening/closing member 52, various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is initially operated, the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at a game shop (only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 (including the replacement of the only), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (first Special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66 , right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not burdened with an extra processing load, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. becomes possible.

In addition, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initialized, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various driving sources is performed. It is possible to inform the worker (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and to allow the operator to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are activated. Since the initial operation is performed, it is possible to appropriately check the operation without complicated work such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing the setting (setting confirmation).

In addition, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, after the operation standby time has passed, the operation of various drive sources for moving the movable body that affects the game result is started. It is possible to provide a time margin from the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the confirmation of the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, regardless of whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is after the setting change mode or after the setting confirmation mode, the same initial operation is notified. , the control of the initial motion notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the gaming machine 1 can be reduced (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big prize opening LED is kept turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to confirm the operation of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 by the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation. .

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and in the game ready state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable effect device 73 which does not affect the result of (1) is performed, two kinds of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed.

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big prize winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are opened. Since the opening signal is not output even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible not to impose an extra processing load on the main control board 110, and to collect information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the progress control of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of the performance information is permitted), the game progress control is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, by not displaying the performance information on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed, the current setting value can be appropriately notified, and it is possible to ensure the convenience of the game parlor.

In addition, during the initial operation of various drive sources, the information display 113 does not display the set values and the performance information of the game machine. , and it is possible to accurately determine failures of various drive sources.

Incidentally, after the progress control of the game is started, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting. , the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 46, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 Operation timing (initial operation, big winning game operation, small winning game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time saving game state) is compared.

The number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven is the same during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state and during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

One driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation can be performed during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, the total driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is shorter during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

One drive time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is longer during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it can be confirmed at the initial operation whether or not the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and the accuracy of operation confirmation can be improved.

Further, the total driving time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is shorter during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

The number of times the passage switching solenoid 52b is driven is greater during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it can be confirmed at the time of the initial operation whether or not the passage switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, the total driving time of the passage switching solenoid 52b is shorter during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

The total drive time of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b is shorter during the initial operation than during the jackpot game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b.

It should be noted that at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is replaced by the number of times of driving and one driving time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. , may be set to the same or nearly the same (similar) value as the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is changed to the number of times of driving and one driving time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. , may be set to a value smaller than the total driving time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening and closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be set to the same or nearly the same (similar) value as the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening and closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be set to a value greater than the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening and closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be a value smaller than the total driving time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation, the driving time of one time, and the total driving time is set to the number of driving times of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. , one driving time, and the total driving time may be the same or almost the same (similar) value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation and the total driving time is set higher than the number of times of driving the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the total driving time during the small winning game operation. It can be a large value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven during the initial operation and the total driving time is set to be smaller than the one driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. can be a value. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the flow path switching solenoid 52b at the time of the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time, the number of times of driving the flow path switching solenoid 52b at the time of the small winning game operation, one driving time , may be set to the same or nearly the same (similar) value as the total driving time. If it does in this way, it can be confirmed at the time of initial operation whether the flow-path switching solenoid 52b can perform small winning game operation, and it becomes possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the one drive time and the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the initial operation is set to one drive time and the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the small winning game operation. It can be a large value. If it does in this way, it can be confirmed at the time of initial operation whether the flow-path switching solenoid 52b can perform small winning game operation, and it becomes possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the initial operation may be set to a smaller value than the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the small winning game operation. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the passage switching solenoid 52b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b at the time of the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to one driving time at the time of the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R), the total It may be the same value as the driving time or almost the same (similar) value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation, the driving time of one time, and the total driving time is set to be greater than the driving time of one time and the total driving time during the jackpot game operation. value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(First modification)
A first modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. In the first modification, the RWM clearing process continues until the RWM clearing switch 111a is operated again, the driving source initial operation process is performed during the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clearing process, and the setting Since it differs from the first embodiment in that the RWM is cleared during execution of the change processing, only the difference from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to portions that match the initial setting process of the main control board of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and the description thereof is omitted, and only different portions and their surroundings will be described.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing for changing (updating) the set value (probability of judging a big hit), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, and the above-mentioned Then, the drive source initial operation process (game program) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing for initializing the control state of the game (initializing other than the set value region of the RWM region for game), and the drive source initial operation processing described above (game program) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26. Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, the process for displaying the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 and the drive source initial operation process described above are performed, and step S30 is executed. to process.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 .

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the image display device displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that the RWM clear preparation is in progress, or the voice output device 9 notifies "Please press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output sound over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, current A process for initially operating the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is performed until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM clear is performed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process proceeds to step S24-2. transfer processing.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 an RWM clear designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized in step S24-6. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for ending the above-described RWM clear preparation notification.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources in response to termination of the RWM clear preparation mode by the RWM clear approval operation, and terminates the current RWM clear processing.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the game results The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the RWM clearing is being prepared is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm the operation of the solenoid Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please do") is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the pre-start state. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, the specific area opening/closing member 52, various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is initially operated, the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at a game shop (only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 (including the replacement of the only), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (first Special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66 , right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not burdened with an extra processing load, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. becomes possible.

In addition, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initialized, setting change notification (setting Since it is designed to perform a setting confirmation notification for prompting confirmation and operation confirmation of various driving sources, the operation confirmation of the game machine 1 is performed to indicate that it is time to confirm the operation of various driving sources. Workers (workers, game staff) can be informed of this, and can be made to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, in the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated, so the game can be started before the game progress control is started. It is possible to reduce the development cost of the gaming machine 1 (shortening the development period, etc.) without creating multiple states in the previous state.

In addition, when the pre-start state ends due to the setting value confirmation operation (confirmation end operation), the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. Therefore, the initial operation of various driving sources is not performed in a game-enabled state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being confused with the operation of various driving sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and in the game ready state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable effect device 73 which does not affect the result of (1) is performed, two kinds of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big prize opening LED is kept turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to confirm the operation of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 by the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation. .

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big prize winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are opened. Since the opening signal is not output even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible not to impose an extra processing load on the main control board 110, and to collect information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the progress control of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of the performance information is permitted), the game progress control is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, by not displaying the performance information on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed, the current setting value can be appropriately notified, and it is possible to ensure the convenience of the game parlor.

In addition, in the setting change notification in the setting change mode, it was designed to display a setting change screen that displays the characters "setting change in progress", but in addition to the characters "setting change in progress", various drive sources It is also possible to display a setting changing screen on which characters such as "driving source initializing" or "please check solenoid operation" prompting visual confirmation of the initial operation of the motor are displayed.

(operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 50, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 Operation timing (initial operation, big winning game operation, small winning game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time saving game state) is compared.

One driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation can be performed during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

One drive time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is longer during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it can be confirmed at the initial operation whether or not the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and the accuracy of operation confirmation can be improved.

In addition, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b at the time of the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the driving time of one time at the time of the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. . In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Also, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, one drive time of the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. . In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, the driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b at the time of the initial operation is the same value as the driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b at the time of the small winning game operation, the total driving time, or They may be substantially the same (similar) values. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation may be set to a smaller value than the driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. . By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

In addition, one driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b at the time of the initial operation, the same value as the one driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b at the time of the small winning game operation, or may be set to substantially the same (similar) value . If it does in this way, it can be confirmed at the time of initial operation whether the flow-path switching solenoid 52b can perform small winning game operation, and it becomes possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the initial operation may be set to a larger value than the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the small winning game operation. If it does in this way, it can be confirmed at the time of initial operation whether the flow-path switching solenoid 52b can perform small winning game operation, and it becomes possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, even if the driving time of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b at the time of the initial operation is set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the driving time of one time at the time of the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). good. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time of the big winning game operation. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(Second modification)
A second modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. In addition, in the second modification, the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, the state confirmation display 68 is not provided, and the RWM clear processing continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. Since the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is different from the first embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

The main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S16. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S23 assuming that the mode is to be shifted to the RWM clear preparation mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S18 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S23 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

The main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S18, and determines whether the checksum is normal in step S19. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S18. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S20, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the RWM clear preparation mode , and the process proceeds to step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, a process for executing power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S22. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S30.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the image display device displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that the RWM clear preparation is in progress, or the voice output device 9 notifies "Please press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output sound over a predetermined period.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM clear is performed, and the process proceeds to step S25. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process of step S24 is repeated. .

In step S25, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S27. Specifically, various driving sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 are initialized. process to make it work. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S31, permits all interrupts to start control of the progress of the game. , the current initial setting process ends.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM is cleared will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various driving sources are initially operated after RWM is cleared.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the game results The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done. At this time, the above-described RWM clear preparation notification is started.

At the timing of T2, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, the specific area opening/closing member 52, various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is initially operated, the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at a game shop (only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 Including the replacement of the only), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first special symbol display 60, the second 2 special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display device 66, right-handed display device 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to avoid imposing an extra processing load on the main control board 110 and to concentrate on confirming the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initialized, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various driving sources is performed. It is possible to inform the worker (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and to allow the operator to appropriately check the operation.

Further, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, after the RWM clear preparation mode is finished, the initial operation of various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the operation confirmation appropriately without complicated work such as confirming the operation of various driving sources while performing the RWM clear approval operation.

In addition, after the RWM clear preparation mode ends, after the operation standby time has passed, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is started, so the RWM clear approval operation After the end of the operation, it is possible to provide a sufficient time to check the operation of various driving sources, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big prize opening LED is kept turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to confirm the operation of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 by the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation. .

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and in the game ready state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable effect device 73 which does not affect the result of (1) is performed, two kinds of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed.

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big prize winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are opened. Since the opening signal is not output even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible not to impose an extra processing load on the main control board 110, and to collect information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the progress control of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of the performance information is permitted), the game progress control is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

It should be noted that various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 in the second modification Various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, small winning game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time saving game state) are the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

(Third modification)
A third modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. The third modification differs from the first embodiment in that the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, and the RWM clearing process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. This is the second modification in that the drive source initial operation process is performed during the clear preparation mode.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the third modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts that correspond to the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modified example shown in FIG. 51, and the explanation is omitted, and only the different parts and their surroundings will be explained.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, current A process for initially operating the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is performed until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and the RWM clear is performed, and the process moves to step S26, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process moves to step S24.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operations of various driving sources, and in step S27, initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
With reference to FIG. 54, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the game results The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm the operation of the solenoid Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please do") is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the pre-start state. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, the specific area opening/closing member 52, various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is initially operated, the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at a game shop (only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 (including the replacement of the only), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first special symbol display 60, the second 2 special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display device 66, right-handed display device 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to avoid imposing an extra processing load on the main control board 110 and to concentrate on confirming the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initialized, an RWM clear preparation notification is made to indicate that the RWM clear is being prepared and to prompt the confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. It is possible to do it.

In addition, in the RWM clear preparation mode, various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated, so in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, a plurality of Therefore, it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

In addition, when the RWM clear approval operation is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. Since the initial operation of the power source is not performed in a game-enabled state, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being confused with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and in the game ready state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable effect device 73 which does not affect the result of (1) is performed, two kinds of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various drive sources for operating the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED is extinguished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the big prize opening LED, and it is possible to properly confirm the operation. It becomes possible to go to

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big prize winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are opened. Since the opening signal is not output even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible not to impose an extra processing load on the main control board 110, and to collect information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the progress control of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of the performance information is permitted), the game progress control is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, in the RWM clear preparation notification in the RWM clear preparation mode, the clear preparation screen that displays the characters "Preparing for RWM clear" was displayed, but in addition to the characters "Preparing for RWM clear" It is also possible to display a clear preparation screen on which characters such as "driving source initial operation in progress" or "please check operation of solenoid" prompting visual confirmation of initial operation of various driving sources are displayed.

Various operation timings (initial Operation, jackpot game operation, small winning game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. Description is omitted.

(Fourth modification)
A fourth modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. The fourth modification differs from the first embodiment in that it does not have a setting change function or a setting confirmation function, and differs from the second modification in that the RWM clear is performed without going through the RWM clear preparation mode. Since there are differences, only the differences from the first embodiment and the second modification will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts that correspond to the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modified example shown in FIG. 51, and the explanation is omitted, and only the different parts and their surroundings will be explained.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S25. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, current A process for initially operating the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for a predetermined period is performed. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after RWM is cleared.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the game results The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 performs RWM clearing and the game progress control is started. The previous pre-start state is entered. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation waiting time (here, 7 seconds) has passed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T3, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T4, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T5, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T6, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the various drive sources start to operate for the third time, and at the timing of T7, the various drive sources are switched off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T8, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation are completed. The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T9, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, the specific area opening/closing member 52, various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is initially operated, the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at a game shop (only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 (including the replacement of the only), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first special symbol display 60, the second 2 special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display device 66, right-handed display device 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to avoid imposing an extra processing load on the main control board 110 and to concentrate on confirming the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initialized, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various driving sources is performed. It is possible to inform the worker (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and to allow the operator to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, after the RWM clear operation is performed and the operation standby time has passed, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is started. Therefore, it is possible to provide a time margin from the end of the RWM clear operation to the confirmation of the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big prize opening LED is kept turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to confirm the operation of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 by the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation. .

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and in the game ready state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable effect device 73 which does not affect the result of (1) is performed, two kinds of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed.

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big prize winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are opened. Since the above-described opening signal is not output even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible not to impose an unnecessary processing load on the main control board 110, and the information output from the game machine 1 It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information collects information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the progress control of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of the performance information is permitted), the game progress control is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Various operation timings (initial Operation, jackpot game operation, small winning game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. Description is omitted.

(Timing chart when normal time-saving gaming state occurs)
FIG. 57 is a timing chart when the normal time-saving gaming state occurs.

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of the special symbols to be a big hit is started. At this time, since it is in the normal game state, all information such as the normal medium payout number and normal medium out number for calculating the normal base value and the total number of outs for setting the game section are aggregated (counted). It is running.

Next, at timing T2, variable display of winning normal symbols is started. In this variable display, a variable display is performed by a relatively long normal pattern variation pattern (variable time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the special symbols is started, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time N of the special symbols (0.5 seconds for the big win) has passed, the big win game (opening) is started, and the right When the beating indicator 67 lights up, the output of a special game signal indicating that the jackpot game is in progress and an advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal game state is started to be output. In addition, the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal period for calculating the normal base value will be stopped, and the aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs for setting the game section will continue (normal base value calculation and display of normal base values).

Then, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

In addition, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this variable display is started during the jackpot game (low-probability non-time-saving game state), the variable display is performed by a relatively long normal pattern variation pattern (variation time 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the jackpot game. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T10, the auxiliary game is finished and the variable display of normal symbols is started. Since this variation display was started during the jackpot game, it is performed with a relatively long normal figure variation pattern for non-time saving state. Then, at the timing of T11, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the normal time-saving game state is started, and the output of the special game signal is stopped.

In addition, at the timing of T12, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T13, when the stop time of the normal symbols has passed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is during the jackpot game (low probability Since it was started during the non-time-saving game state), the second start port 47 will be opened with a short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T14, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display is normally started during the time saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T15, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T16, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is in the normal time-saving game state. Since it was started, the 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the long opening time for time saving states. Then, at the timing of T16, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started.

Here, an example is shown in which the normal time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of the normal symbols, but even if the normal time-saving game state occurs during the normal symbol stop display or during the auxiliary game, the following normal From the fluctuation display of the pattern, the fluctuation display by the relatively short normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time saving state is performed.

Thus, when the normal time-saving gaming state occurs, the normal time-saving gaming state occurs after a predetermined period of time has passed since the stop display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit ends (after the big winning game ends). ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous during the jackpot game, and to secure the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side.

Also, when a normal time-saving gaming state (low-probability short-time gaming state) occurs, a predetermined period before the normal time-saving gaming state occurs is started), the right-handed indicator 67 is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in connection with the occurrence of the normal time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, when a normal time-saving gaming state (low-probability short-time gaming state) occurs, a predetermined period before the normal time-saving gaming state occurs is started), the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted). Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even during the period when the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal period for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended), the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value will not be possible. Since it is continued, it is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the normal time-saving gaming state (low-probability short-time gaming state) occurs, the advantageous state signal from a predetermined period before the occurrence of the normal time-saving gaming state (at the start of the jackpot game, which is a low-probability short-time gaming state) It is designed to output. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the outside.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of the normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, from the next normal symbol variation display to a relatively short normal pattern for the time-saving state. Fluctuation display is performed according to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of the normal symbols midway due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Also, when the normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the variation display by the relatively short normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state is performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game The second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time saving state. Therefore, complicated processing such as changing control of variable display of normal symbols and control of auxiliary game due to occurrence of normal time-saving game state is not performed, and processing load can be reduced.

(Timing chart when the normal time-saving gaming state ends)
FIG. 58 is a timing chart when the normal time-saving game state ends.

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of the special symbols, which is the final time in the normal time-saving game state, that is, the variable display of the special symbols that result in a loss is started. At this time, since the game is in the normal time-saving game state, the right-handed indicator 67 is lit, and the advantageous state signal is output. In addition, since it is in the normal time-saving gaming state, while the information totaling (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), the game section is set Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs for

Next, at timing T2, variable display of winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display is normally started during the time saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

Then, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is in the normal time-saving game state. Since it was started, the 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the long opening time for time saving states.

After that, at the timing of T5, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the time saving state, it is performed with a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

In addition, at the timing of T6, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is in the normal time-saving game state. Since it was started, the 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the long opening time for time saving states.

Next, at the timing of T8, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display is normally started during the time saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time saving state. Then, at the timing of T9, when the stop display of the special symbols is started, the normal time-saving game state is terminated and the normal game state is started, the right-handed display 67 is extinguished, and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. be done. In addition, since the normal game state is entered, totaling (counting) of the normal medium payout number and the normal medium out number for calculating the normal base value is restarted. In addition, stop display of normal symbols is started.

After that, at the timing of T10, the stop time of the normal symbols has passed and the auxiliary game is started, but since the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal time-saving game state, the second time is the long open time for the time-saving state. The starting port 47 is opened.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the auxiliary game ends, the variation display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this variable display is started during the normal game state, the variable display is performed by a relatively long normal pattern variation pattern (variation time 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time M (8.0 seconds at the end of the time saving) elapses, the variable display of the next losing special symbol is started. Then, at the timing of T13, the stop display of the normal symbols is disclosed, and at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the non-time saving state. Then, at the timing of T15, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started.

Here, an example in which the normal time-saving game state ends during the stop display of the normal symbol is shown, but even if the normal time-saving game state ends during the variable display of the normal symbol or during the auxiliary game, the following normal From the fluctuation display of the pattern, the fluctuation display by the relatively long normal pattern fluctuation pattern (variation time 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state is performed.

In addition, in the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving game state, the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the normal time-saving game state is ended, so the right-handed display 67 is extinguished and an advantageous state. The output of the signal is stopped, and the tallying (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value is resumed.

In this way, when the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state advantageous to the player ends. there is Therefore, it is possible to secure the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side, and to provide the player with an unprecedented game property such as a normal time-saving game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, when the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal time-saving gaming state is terminated and the right-handed display 67 is extinguished. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in connection with the end of the normal time-saving gaming state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, when the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal time-saving gaming state ends and the normal base value is calculated. Aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts and the number of outs during normal operation is restarted. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, when the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal time-saving gaming state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. It's becoming Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the outside.

Also, if the normal time-saving game state ends during the variable display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the relatively long normal for the non-time-saving state from the next normal symbol variation display. Variation display is performed according to the figure variation pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of the normal symbols in the middle due to the end of the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the variation display by the relatively long normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state is performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game The 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the short opening time for non-work-time-saving states. Therefore, complicated processing such as changing control of variable display of normal symbols and control of auxiliary game due to occurrence of normal time-saving game state is not performed, and processing load can be reduced.

(Timing chart from before the start of the special time-saving gaming state to after the end)
FIG. 59 is a timing chart from before the start of the special time-saving gaming state to after the end due to the fact that the variable display of the special symbols has reached the specified number of times (500 times).

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of the special symbol that becomes the stipulated number of times (500 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game) is started. be. In addition, at the timing of T2, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. In this variable display, a variable display is performed by a relatively long normal pattern variation pattern (variable time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T3, when the stop display of the special symbols is started, the special time-saving game state is started regardless of whether it is in the customer waiting state, the right-handed indicator 67 lights up, and the normal game state. The output of an advantageous state signal that is more advantageous to the player than is started. In addition, due to the special time-saving gaming state, the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), and the total number of outs for setting the game section Aggregation (counting) is continued (calculation of normal base values and display of normal base values are also continued).

Then, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time N (usually 0.5 seconds) elapses, the variable display of the special symbol that is lost is started.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Next, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed in a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is during the special time-saving game state. Since it was started, the 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the long opening time for time saving states. In addition, stop display of the lost special symbol is started.

Further, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time N (0.5 seconds for losing) has elapsed, the next losing special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing of T11, the variable display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit after the auxiliary game ends is disclosed. Since this fluctuation display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed in a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T12, the variable display of the special symbols, which is the final time in the special time-saving game state, that is, the variable display of the special symbols to be lost is started. In addition, when the stop time of the normal pattern elapses, the auxiliary game is disclosed, but since the variable display of the normal pattern is started during the special time-saving game state, the second start port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time-saving state. will do.

Next, at the timing of T13, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed in a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T14, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T15, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is during the special time-saving game state. Since it was started, the 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the long opening time for time saving states.

Also, at the timing of T16, when the stop display of the losing special symbol (M for time saving final variation) is started, the special time saving game state is ended and the normal game state is started, and the right hitting display 67 is extinguished. At the same time, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. In addition, since the normal game state is entered, counting of the normal medium payout number and the normal medium out number for calculating the normal base value is resumed.

Furthermore, at the timing of T17, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display is normally started during the game state (non-time saving state), it is performed in a relatively long normal figure fluctuation pattern for the non-time saving state.

In addition, at the timing of T18, when the stop time M (8.0 seconds for the final time-saving variation) of the losing special symbols has passed, the variable display of the special losing symbols is started, and at the timing of T19, the losing special symbols are displayed. Stop display is started.

Then, at the timing of T20, the variable display of the special symbols that are lost is started. In addition, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display is normally started during the game state (non-time saving state), it is performed in a relatively long normal figure fluctuation pattern for the non-time saving state.

Then, at the timing of T21, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but since the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state, the short opening time for the non-time saving state is used. The starting port 47 is opened.

Here, an example is shown in which the special time-saving game state is started during the variable display of the normal symbols, but even if the special time-saving game state occurs during the normal symbol stop display or during the auxiliary game, the following From the fluctuation display of the normal pattern, the fluctuation display by the relatively short normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time saving state is performed.

In addition, an example in which the special time-saving game state ends during the execution of the auxiliary game is shown, but even if the special time-saving game state ends during the normal symbol fluctuation display or during the normal symbol stop display, the following From the variation display of the normal pattern to be executed, the variation display by the relatively long normal pattern variation pattern for the non-time saving state is performed.

In addition, although the variable display of the special symbol, which is the final time in the special time-saving game state, is shown as a loss, even if it becomes a small hit, the variable display of the normal symbol to be executed next is non-time-saving. Fluctuation display by the relatively long normal figure fluctuation pattern for the state will be performed.

In this way, as a result of the fluctuation display of the special pattern that is the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the losing special pattern is stopped. When displayed, a special time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player is generated (started) regardless of whether or not the player is waiting for a customer. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a game feature that does not exist in the past, in which a time-saving state occurs even though the game is lost, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (The stop time is started), a special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and the right-handed indicator 67 lights up. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that the player suffers in relation to the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (Stop time is started), a special time-saving gaming state occurs (starting) and stops counting the number of payouts during normal and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value, that is, the special time-saving gaming state The calculation of the number of payouts during normal and the number of out during normal are continued until immediately before the occurrence of . Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

Also, even while the tallying of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal period for calculating the normal base value is stopped, the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value will continue. It is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the normal base value that is used.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (The stop time is started), a special time-saving gaming state occurs (starts) and an advantageous state signal is output. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the outside.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, from the next normal symbol variable display to a relatively short time-saving state. Fluctuation display is performed according to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of the normal symbols on the way due to the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the fluctuation display by the relatively short normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state is performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game The second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time saving state. Therefore, complicated processing such as changing control of variable display of normal symbols and control of auxiliary game due to the occurrence of the special time-saving game state is not performed, and the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the final round (750th time) in the special time-saving gaming state, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player ends. ing. Therefore, it is possible to secure the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side, and provide the player with a special time-saving game state, which has never existed before, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the final round (750th time) in the special time-saving game state, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special time-saving game state ends and the right-handed display 67 is extinguished. It is designed to Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in connection with the end of the special time-saving gaming state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the final round (750th time) in the special time-saving gaming state, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special time-saving gaming state ends and the normal base value is calculated. In other words, the calculation of the normal payout number and the normal out number is restarted from the end of the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the losing special pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern that is the final round (750th time) in the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. It is designed to Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the outside.

Also, if the special time-saving game state ends during the variable display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the relatively long normal for the non-time-saving state from the next normal symbol variation display. Variation display is performed according to the figure variation pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of normal symbols in the middle due to the end of the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the fluctuation display by the relatively long normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state is performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game The 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the short opening time for non-work-time-saving states. Therefore, complicated processing such as changing control of variable display of normal symbols and control of auxiliary game due to the occurrence of the special time-saving game state is not performed, and the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, as a result of the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display, You may make it stop-display for a time longer than normal stop time (0.5 second). In this way, it is possible to make the player notice that the special time-saving gaming state occurs from the length of the stop time, and to secure the time for producing that the special time-saving gaming state occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the stop display of the losing special symbol, which is stopped and displayed as a result of the specified number of times (500th) special symbol fluctuation display, is performed for a longer period of time than the normal stop time, a special time-saving game is played during the stop time. You may make it perform the production|presentation which suggests that a state will generate|occur|produce. If it does in this way, generation|occurrence|production of a special time-saving game state can be immediately notified to a player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

(Main processing of production control unit)
Main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart of main processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a inhibits all interrupts in step E1, performs CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted at step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs a sub random number update process in step E7. Specifically, a process of updating various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing in the effect control section 130m. This timer interrupt processing is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters necessary for execution of the effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting control process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed in the customer waiting state where the special symbol fluctuation display and the special game (jackpot game, small winning game) are not executed, and the customer Processing for executing a customer waiting demonstration performance for stimulating a player's willingness to play is performed based on the lapse of the waiting time.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs operation-related effect execution processing. Specifically, the promotion performance to prompt the operation of the performance button 17 is executed during the effective period generated during the variable performance, and the degree of expectation that the big win game is executed is calculated according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the effective period. A process for executing a big-hit announcement effect of the operation system that suggests (makes an expectation that a big-hit game will be executed) is performed.

As for the "operation-based jackpot announcement effect", the dialogue announcement effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed depending on the type and display mode of the dialogue displayed on the image display device, and the result of the roulette executed on the image display device A roulette notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed by a cut-in notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed depending on the type and display mode of the cut-in image displayed on the image display device, a jackpot game There are four types of success performance with 100% expectation for execution of , or failure performance with 0% expectation for execution of big winning game, suggesting whether or not a special game will be executed.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp lighting effect execution process. Specifically, by changing the light emission mode of the starter lamp 75 according to the change in the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the icon, the lamp light is emitted to suggest the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. Perform processing for executing the production.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, the production mode (production stage) in which production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) are defined in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. is updated. It is determined whether or not the conditions (change in game state, win of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance where the result is lost, etc.) are satisfied, and if the update condition is satisfied, the performance mode is changed to multiple performances. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" is the production mode A to C, countdown mode set in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), rush battle mode set in the normal time-saving game state, boisterous mode, super boisterous dance mode, infinite mode etc. are provided. It should be noted that when the power is turned on and the normal game state is controlled (for example, after changing the settings, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the settings, etc.), the effect mode that is set first is always the effect mode A, and the power is turned on. The performance mode that is set first in the case of being controlled to the time-saving game state at the time of ON is one of rush battle mode, boisterous dance mode, super boisterous dance mode, and infinite mode.

"Production modes A to C" are when the normal special figure variation pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. When the number of times is 51 times or more), the effect mode is set.
"Countdown mode" is when the normal special figure variation pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. When the following) is set to production mode.

"Rush battle mode" is when the special figure variation pattern determination table 1 or 2 for normal time saving shown in FIG. 21 is selected (7 times is selected as the second time saving number of times) It is a production mode set to .
"Ranbu mode" is when the special figure variation pattern determination table 3 or 4 for normal time reduction shown in FIG. When the state and the remaining number of small hits is 1 (including the case where it is reduced to 1)), or the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for special time saving shown in FIG. When selected (when a special time-saving game state in which 750 times is selected as the second time-saving number of times and the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 1 time), the production mode is set.

"Super Ranbu Mode" is when the special figure variation pattern determination table 5 or 6 for normal time saving shown in FIG. When the remaining number of hits is 2 times), it is a production mode set.
"Infinite mode" is when the special figure variation pattern determination table 7 or 8 for normal time saving shown in FIG. When the remaining number of times is 2), or when the special figure variation pattern determination table 1 or 2 for special time saving shown in FIG. 25 is selected (750 times is selected as the second time saving number of times It is a production mode set in the time saving game state and the remaining number of small hits is 2 times).

The sub CPU 130a performs a special reduction in working hours production process in step E750. Specifically, a special time-saving system production for suggesting information related to the occurrence of a special time-saving game state (RWM clear denial production that suggests that the RWM clear described later is not performed (is stationary), a special time-saving game It performs processing such as determination of whether or not to execute activation counter display, etc., suggesting the number of fluctuations until transition to the state. In addition, the detail of special time reduction system production|presentation processing is mentioned later.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150 is performed.

At step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c at step E100, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis processing of production control unit)
The command analysis processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If the command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302, and if the command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change notification processing in step E303. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting confirmation notification processing in step E305. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E308.

In step E307, the sub CPU 130a performs power-on notification processing. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. In the case of , a process of setting a notification instruction command for executing the above-described power restoration notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, processing for executing power-on notification or power recovery notification, and the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable An initial operation for operating the member 73b) in a predetermined mode, an initial light emission for causing the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined mode, and the like are performed.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error system designation command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error system designation command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error type designation command" includes unrecoverable error designation command, illegal winning error designation command, abnormal winning error designation command, magnetic error designation command, radio wave error designation command, door open error start designation command, door open error end designation Commands, operation error specification commands, etc. are included.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notification according to the type of error designation command received (non-recoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification etc.), the notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, the process of setting the effect instruction command to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to update the number of reserved special figures stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the number of reserved icons displayed on the image display device conduct. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the pending icons displayed on the image display device is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a prefetch designation command. If it is a prefetching designation command, the received prefetching designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is set in the later-described prefetching storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and then the process is moved to step E315, and if it is not a prefetching designation command, Processing is transferred to step E318.

The "prefetching storage area" is a first prefetching storage unit for sequentially storing prefetching information (such as a special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) based on the first prefetching designation command, and a second prefetching designation command. and a second prefetch storage unit for storing prefetch information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) being executed (0th storage unit). The two prefetch storage units are divided into first to fourth storage units, respectively.

The first to fourth storage units of the first prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-described first special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and when the first prefetch designation command is received, the The prefetch information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the one-hold number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area described above, respectively, and when the second prefetch designation command is received, the 2 Prefetch information is stored in a storage unit corresponding to the number of reservations. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the special figure determination information execution storage area described above, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit The prefetch information that moves (shifts) from is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the prefetch information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second prefetch unit is stored. be.

In step E315, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing. Specifically, it is expected that a special game will be executed by displaying the reserved icon or the icon displayed on the image display device in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) different from the normal display mode (normal icon). A process for determining whether or not to execute an icon change effect suggesting a degree (possibility) and the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed is performed. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a performs a win-time lighting effect determination process. Specifically, a special game is played by causing the top lamp 10b in the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 to emit light in a special light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode when the game ball enters the starting hole. A process for determining whether or not to execute a prize-winning light-emitting effect suggesting the degree of expectation that is executed, and the effect mode of the prize-winning light-emitting effect to be executed.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect determination process. Specifically, by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols, it is expected that the big win game will be executed (suggesting the possibility that the big win game will be executed). Whether or not to execute the read-ahead continuous effect, the type of the read-ahead continuous effect to be executed is determined, and the processing of setting the effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c for executing the read-ahead continuous effect is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed. The details of the look-ahead continuous effect determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special design designation command, the process moves to step E319, and if it is not a special design designation command, the process moves to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E319. Specifically, a process for determining the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, etc. is performed.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command in step E320. If it is a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E321, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E325.

In step E321, the sub CPU 130a performs variation effect pattern determination processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the special figure variation pattern designation command received, the variation performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variation performance executed by the performance device including the image display device, is determined, and the performance showing the variation performance pattern The instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed. The details of the variation effect pattern determination process will be described later.

In step E322, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot announcement effect determination process. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E321, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot announcement performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed). Alternatively, the process of determining the effect mode (pattern) of the big win notice effect to be executed and setting the execution information of the big win notice effect in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon display mode update processing in step E323. Specifically, processing for starting the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process of step E315, or changing the display mode of the pending icon already displayed or the icon is performed.

In step E324, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect execution process. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous effect determined in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 or changing the effect mode to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a pattern confirmation command. If it is a design determination command, the process moves to step E326, and if it is not a design determination command, the process moves to step E327.

In step E326, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol stop processing. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbols in the temporarily stopped state to end the variable effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for ending the variable effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, this command analysis process is terminated.

The "special game system designation command" includes a jackpot opening designation command, a jackpot round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, a small winning opening designation command, a small winning ending designation command, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game effect determination processing in step E328. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, a process of setting an effect instruction command for determining the opening effect of the big win game or the small win game and executing the opening effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and the round is performed. In the case of the specified command, the process of setting the effect instruction command for determining the round effect of the round game and executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the ending specifying command, the jackpot game or the A process of setting an effect instruction command for determining the ending effect of the small winning game and executing the ending effect in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed, and the current command analysis process is finished. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current icon change rendering is executable. If it is during the period during which the icon change effect can be executed, the process proceeds to step E315-3, and if it is not during the period during which the icon change effect can be executed, it is assumed that the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E315-7.

The “executable period of the icon change effect” means that the jackpot game is not being executed, that the normal game state is entered when the prefetch designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received, and the second start port. When a prefetch designation command based on the winning to 47 is received, it is a time-saving game state (specific game state).

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the pre-reservation (reservation storage corresponding to the previously received pre-reading designation command), that is, whether or not the change scenario is set in the pre-read information storage area. determine whether If there is a change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process moves to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E315-5. , selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E315-6. Specifically, with reference to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 40, a plurality of final icon display modes are selected based on the type of the starting point winning designation command and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. Determines the final display mode of one of the icons.

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (one of blue icon, red icon, and rainbow icon) that executes an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-12.

At step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 65) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 41, based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of pending memories of the special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario to determine one change scenario from a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the winning icon. The icon display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect (a first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and a second winning sound when displayed as a special icon or a specific icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the suspended icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the preceding hold. The icon change effect may be executed when the action is not to be performed, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the ready-to-win effect is to be performed. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the hold icon during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. change of the display mode occurs, the ready-to-win effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, even if the advance hold includes the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but if the advance hold does not include the reach effect, the reach effect The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) than in the case of including the

In addition, when receiving a prefetch designation command relating to the second special symbol in the time saving game state, the icon change effect is executed, but even if the prefetch designation command relating to the second special symbol is received in the time saving game state The icon change effect may not be executed. In this case, the icon may be displayed but the icon change effect may not be executed, or the icon itself may not be displayed and the icon change effect may not be executed.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the type of prefetching designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected are associated with each other. The production contents of the scheduled variation pattern to be performed are described.

In the final icon display mode, there are normal icons (white icons) that do not suggest the degree of expectation for a big or small win, and special icons (blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) that suggest the degree of expectation for a big or small win. is set. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win or a small win for a special icon is higher in the order of (white icon<) blue icon<red icon<rainbow icon (big win confirmed).

A first feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. If the prefetch designation command indicates a small hit, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final icon display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by preventing the player from being overjoyed at the moment when the small winning game is not decided to be executed.

As a second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 64, a red icon The percentage of red icons that indicate a big win is higher than the percentage of red icons that are determined. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the big win and the small win for which the execution of the big win game is not confirmed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that when the look-ahead designation command indicates a small hit, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final display mode of the icon. As long as there is, the game ball will pass through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% and the jackpot game will be executed, so the rainbow icon may be determined as the final icon display mode. In this way, the player's awareness of the small winning game can be heightened, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, if the rainbow icon is determined when the look-ahead designation command related to the second special symbol transmitted only during the time-saving gaming state indicates a small hit, the rainbow icon indicates a small hit. It is preferable that the percentage of determining the rainbow icon, which indicates a big win, be higher than the percentage of determining.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected are associated. The advance change in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the change are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during the execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 04, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during the execution of the prior variation and during the execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether it is in the normal game state (first special symbol icon) or in the specific game state (second special symbol icon). In the case of the state (icon of the second special symbol), the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is higher than the rate at which the icon changes due to the prior change (for example, 20:80, 0:100, etc.). may In addition, the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is set to be higher in the specific game state (second special symbol icon) than in the normal game state (first special symbol icon). may

(Light emission effect determination processing at the time of winning of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 66, the prize-winning lighting effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing a win-time lighting effect determination process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E316-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E316-2, determines whether or not the current time is within the executable period of the light emission effect at the time of winning. If it is during the period during which the lighting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the process is shifted to step E316-3, and if it is not during the period during which the lighting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the lighting effect at the time of winning is executed based on the prefetch designation command received this time. Assuming that it will not be performed, the current lighting effect determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

The ``executable period of the light emitting effect at the time of winning'' is that the jackpot game is not being executed, that the normal game state is entered when the prefetch designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received, and the second start When a prefetch designation command based on the winning to the mouth 47 is received, it is in a time-saving game state.

In step E316-3, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random value for determining a winning light emission effect pattern for determining the effect pattern of the winning light emission effect to be executed in the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and step E316-3. In 4, a win light emission effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 67) for determining a win light light effect pattern is selected. The details of the win-time light emission effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E316-5, the sub CPU 130a determines a prize-winning lighting effect pattern. Specifically, referring to the winning light emission effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, a plurality of One light emission performance pattern at the time of winning is determined from among the light emission performance patterns at the time of winning.

In step E316-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined winning light emitting effect pattern is a pattern for executing the winning light emitting effect. In the case of the pattern of executing the light emission effect at the time of winning, the processing is shifted to step E316-7, and in the case of the pattern of not executing the light emission effect at the time of winning, the current light emission effect determination processing at the time of winning ends.

In step E316-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the winning light emission effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light emission effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current winning light emission effect determination process. As a result, the win light emission effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the win light emission effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the win light emission effect execution command.

(Light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a win-time light-emitting effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a win-time light-emitting effect pattern.

In the winning lighting effect pattern determination table, the type of special symbol, the type of prefetching designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning lighting effect pattern, and the winning lighting effect pattern to be selected. As a reference, the effect mode for each lighting effect pattern at the time of winning is described.

As the winning-time light-emitting performance patterns, a winning-time light-emitting performance pattern 00 for which the winning-time light-emitting performance is not executed and winning-time light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02 for which the winning-time light-emitting performance is executed are set. In the prize-winning lighting effect patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light, and the audio output device 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect.

As the first feature of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning shown in FIG. However, there is a point that it is easy to execute the lighting effect at the time of winning. By doing so, it becomes easy to increase the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the variable performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the winning-time light-emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the winning-time light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the winning light emission pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that there is no winning light emission effect pattern (performance mode) that determines a big hit (correct), unlike the icon final display mode shown in FIG. mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player from the time when the game ball enters the starting hole until the result of the variable performance is derived, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to provide a light-emitting effect pattern at the time of winning that confirms the jackpot (for example, the top lamp 10b emits light in rainbow colors and outputs a confirmation sound from the audio output device 9). It is preferable to determine the light emission performance pattern at the time of winning with which the jackpot is decided at the lowest rate when is executed.

(Look-ahead continuous effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The look-ahead continuous effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead continuous effect determination process in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E317-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is moved to step E530-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the current prefetching continuous effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

At step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the present time is the period during which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed. If it is during the look-ahead zone effect executable period, the process proceeds to step E317-4, and if it is not the look-ahead zone effect executable period, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E317-6.

"Looking ahead zone effect" means effecting in the zone over one or more variable effects (display of lookahead zone background image, display of blue zone image or red heat zone image, output of zone BGM or heat zone BGM). This is an effect that continuously suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by a background image, character information, and color information (expected value information), and is a kind of look-ahead continuous effect.

The ``executable period of the look-ahead zone effect'' includes, for example, when there is no pre-reading zone effect to be executed in the preceding hold, when the jackpot game is not in progress, and when the normal game state is in progress. Therefore, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the normal game state, but the look-ahead zone effect is not executed in the time-saving game state.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 69) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone effect. Details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 69, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each advance notice scenario Based on (%), one look-ahead zone effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead zone effect scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead zone effect as the effect scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone effect scenario in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present time is the executable period of the look-ahead countdown effect. If it is during the look-ahead countdown effect executable period, the process proceeds to step E317-9, and if it is not the look-ahead countdown effect executable period, it is assumed that the look-ahead countdown effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E317-11.

"Look-ahead countdown effect" is a countdown effect (display of count image, output of count sound) over one or more variable effects. It is a suggestive production, and it is a kind of look-ahead continuous production.

The ``executable period of the look-ahead countdown effect'' includes that there is no pre-reading countdown effect to be executed in the preceding hold, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the time-saving game state is in effect. Therefore, the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed in the normal game state, but the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed in the time-saving game state.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 70) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead countdown effect. Details of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead countdown effect scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead countdown production scenario determination table shown in FIG. 70, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each production scenario Based on (%), one look-ahead countdown effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead countdown effect scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead countdown effect as the effect scenario in which the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch countdown effect scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead countdown effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead countdown effect is performed. When this process ends, the current look-ahead continuous effect determination process ends.

In this way, the type of the look-ahead continuous effect executed in the normal game state and the time-saving game state is made different. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in a time-saving game state in which a short variable time is likely to be determined because the number of reservations increases more easily than in the normal game state, the look-ahead zone effect that is continuously executed over one or more variable effects is not executed. there is As a result, the inconvenience of lowering the performance effect of the look-ahead zone performance, which is desired to secure a long performance time in one variable performance, does not occur, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in a time-saving game state in which a short variable time is likely to be determined because the number of holdings increases more easily than in a normal game state, a look-ahead countdown effect that is intermittently executed over one or a plurality of variable effects is executed. there is Therefore, the anticipation of the player can be easily increased by the look-ahead countdown effect that requires a short effect time in one variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the look-ahead zone effect may be executed also in the time-saving game state, and the look-ahead countdown effect may be executed also in the normal game state.

(Look-ahead Zone Production Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table referred to when determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario.

In the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the production scenario for each look-ahead zone production, and the look-ahead to be selected Effect scenarios of zone effects are associated with each other, and for reference, advance variations in each effect scenario and effect modes of look-ahead zone effects in the changes are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Zone" is the execution of normal effects during the zone (display of the look-ahead zone background image, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM). This means that a heat zone middle effect (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of heat zone BGM) with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the effect is executed.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, and a scenario in which the zone effect is executed during the change without executing the zone effect during the preliminary change ( For example, a scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an in-zone effect is executed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. The point is that an effect scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to an effect mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of the special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the effect mode of the effect in the zone progresses (changes), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that the effect state of the look-ahead zone effect progresses (changes) more easily with the change than with the advance change. By doing so, it is possible to easily maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can be brought to the climax in the fluctuation, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Look-ahead countdown effect scenario decision table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table referred to when determining a look-ahead countdown effect scenario.

In the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specified command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead specified command, the selection rate (%) of the play scenario for each look-ahead countdown effect, and the selected look-ahead Production scenarios for the countdown production are associated with each other, and for reference, the pre-variation in each production scenario and the production mode of the anticipatory countdown production in the variation are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Count 3" means that a count image indicating "3" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "Count 2" means that a count image indicating "2" is displayed and a count sound is output. "Count 1" means displaying a count image indicating "1" and outputting a count sound. "Count 0" means displaying a count image indicating "0". and a count sound is output.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 70 is that the look-ahead countdown effect is executed not only in the case of a big win, but also in the case of a small win (a scheduled variation pattern that makes a small win expected). There are some points that are possible. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the small winning game in which the big winning game is executed by the entry of the game ball into the specific area 53 will be executed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

A second feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 70 is that the maximum value of the count is "3" regardless of whether it is a big win or a small win. By doing so, the player can have a sense of anticipation without being conscious of whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 70 is that the look-ahead countdown effect has the same effect mode regardless of whether it is a big win or a small win. By doing so, the player can have a sense of anticipation without being conscious of whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the scheduled variation pattern is a small win, the number of rounds of the big win game and the number of time reductions that shift when the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the small win game are specified or countdown production in an unpredictable manner. is executed, the number of rounds of the big winning game and the number of times of time reduction to be shifted when the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the small winning game are specified or countdown performance is executed in a predictable manner. You may do so. For example, when the number of rounds or time saving is relatively small, and when the number of rounds or time saving is relatively large, the font and size of the count image can be changed, or the type and volume of the count sound can be changed. may

(Variation production pattern determination processing of production control unit)
The fluctuation production pattern determination processing of the production control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flow chart of the variation effect pattern determination process in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E321-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E321-2, determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. If it is in the normal game state, the process moves to step E321-3, and if it is not in the normal game state (time-saving game state), the process moves to step E321-7.

In step E321-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect is the remaining reserve portion of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. If it is the remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol, the process is moved to step E321-4, and if it is not the remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol), step E321- Move to 6.

In step E321-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol is in the normal time-saving gaming state. If it is not in the normal time-saving game state (it is in the special time-saving game state), the process is moved to step E321-6, and if it is in the normal time-saving game state, in step E321-5 , the variable effect pattern determination table for remaining reservation (see FIG. 72(c)) is selected, and the process proceeds to step E321-14. The details of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for remaining hold will be described later.

At step E321-6, the sub CPU 130a selects a normal variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) and shifts the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current state is the normal time-saving gaming state. If it is not a normal time-saving game state (it is a special time-saving game state), the process is moved to step E321-13, and if it is a normal time-saving game state, in step E321-8, the current fluctuation production is a normal time-saving game. It is determined whether or not it is a variable performance before the final in the state (the number of remaining time reduction is 1 or more). If it is not the final variable production (it is the final variable production), the process is moved to step E321-10, and if it is the variable production before the final, in step E321-9, the normal time-saving final pre-variation Select the variation effect pattern determination table for (not shown) and move the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current battle mode is the rush battle mode. In the case of the rush battle mode, in step E321-11, the variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the normal time saving final variation (see FIG. 72 (a)) is selected, and the process is moved to step E321-14, and the rush battle If it is not in the mode, at step E321-12, the variation performance pattern determination table 2 for normal time saving final variation (see FIG. 72(b)) is selected, and the process proceeds to step E321-14. In addition, the details of the variation production pattern determination table for normal time saving final variation will be described later.

In step E321-13, the sub CPU 130a selects a variable performance pattern determination table for special time saving (not shown) and shifts the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-14, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from a plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E321-15, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table for time saving final variation)
FIG. 72(a) is a diagram showing a variation performance pattern determination table 1 for time saving final variation referred to when determining a variation performance pattern in the final variation performance in the normal time saving game state (rush battle mode), FIG. 72(b) is a diagram showing a variation performance pattern determination table 2 for time saving final variation referred to when determining a variation performance pattern in the final variation performance in the normal time saving game state (other than rush battle mode). .

As shown in Figure 72 (a) and Figure 72 (b), in the variation effect pattern determination table for the time saving final variation, the type of special figure variation pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern specification command, the current second special The look-ahead result of the remaining reserved patterns, the selection rate (%) of each variable performance pattern, and the selected variable performance pattern are associated with each other, and the performance configuration in each variable performance pattern is described as a reference.

The “final battle introduction effect” is an introduction effect to the final battle effect in which the player faces off against the enemy character with a big hit or a small hit in the variable effect at which the time-saving game state ends.
"Final battle SP ready-to-win" is a special SP ready-to-win effect that performs the final battle effect described above. , and performs a battle production in which the character confronts an enemy character.
"Final battle SP ready-to-win with guaranteed victory" is a special SP ready-to-win effect that performs the above-mentioned final battle effect, and the two effect patterns 70a forming the ready-to-win state are reduced and displayed on the upper side of the image display device. It moves to both corners, and performs a battle effect in which it is certain that the character will win against the enemy character.

The “defeat effect” is a effect suggesting that the enemy character has been defeated in the final battle effect.
The “victory effect” is a effect suggesting victory over the enemy character in the final battle effect.

The “result display” is an effect that displays the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues triggered by the jackpot game from the normal game state called so-called first hit.
The "special result display" is basically the same as the result display described above, but suggests that a big win or a small win will be made in the variable performance related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. It is a result display as a kind of look-ahead effect.

"End suggestion effect" is a effect that suggests that the normal time-saving game state ends. It is a production that is shown to the player like this.
"Resurrection effect" is a effect that notifies (suggests) that a big win or a small win has occurred from a place that was lost, and specifically, a combination of big win effect patterns appears by breaking the shutter image. It is a performance.

A first feature of the variable performance pattern determination table 1 for time saving final variation shown in FIG. 72(a) is that a variable performance pattern in which the final battle performance is always executed is selected. By doing so, it is possible to efficiently improve the expectation of the player in the final variable performance in the time-saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the variable production pattern determination table 1 for the time saving final fluctuation shown in FIG. There are some things that can be done. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of security from the start of the battle production (final battle SP reach), and to improve the interest of the game.

As a third feature of the variable performance pattern determination table 1 for time saving final variation shown in FIG. 72 (a), the variable performance related to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of normal game state transition becomes a small hit or a big hit. In some cases, even if the final variable effect in the time-saving gaming state is a loss, a battle effect for confirming victory as a kind of look-ahead effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected variable performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fourth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table 1 for time saving final fluctuation shown in FIG. 72 (a), it becomes a big hit or a small hit in the fluctuation production related to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of normal game state transition. A special result display may be executed as a kind of look-ahead effect suggesting that. By doing so, it is possible to arouse the joy of the player by pretending that the time-saving game state is over, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table 2 for time saving final variation shown in FIG. 72(b) is that a variable effect pattern in which the result display from the end suggesting effect is always executed is selected. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know the result of the game during the series of advantageous periods, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table 2 for the time saving final fluctuation shown in FIG. 72(b), when the final fluctuation production in the time saving gaming state becomes a small win or a big win, a resurrection production is executed. points. By doing so, it is possible to surprise the player by making the player think that the normal time-saving game state has ended, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the third feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table 2 for time saving final fluctuation shown in FIG. A special result display may be executed as a kind of look-ahead effect suggesting that. By doing so, it is possible to arouse the joy of the player by pretending that the time-saving game state is over, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table for remaining hold)
FIG. 72(c) is a diagram showing a variation performance pattern determination table for remaining hold referred to when determining a variation performance pattern in the variation performance relating to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. .

As shown in FIG. 72 (c), the variation effect pattern determination table for remaining reservation includes the type of special figure variation pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, the selection The variation production patterns to be set are associated with each other, and the production configuration in each variation production pattern is described as a reference.

"Result continuation" is an effect that continues the result display in the final variable effect of the time saving game state.
The “resurrection effect” is a effect suggesting that the result display in the final variable effect in the time-saving game state is revived to become a big win or a small win.
"Resurrection long effect" is a effect that is performed for a longer period than the above-mentioned revival effect, suggesting that the result display in the final variable effect in the time-saving game state will be revived and a big win or a small win will occur. .

As the first feature of the variable performance pattern determination table for remaining hold shown in FIG. 72(b), the result display in the final variable performance of the time-saving gaming state may be taken over and the result display may be continued. . By doing so, a series of performances can be performed from the final variable performance of the time saving game state, and the performance effect before and after the time saving game state ends can be improved.

As a second feature of the variable production pattern determination table for remaining hold shown in FIG. There are points to do. By doing so, a series of performances can be performed from the final variable performance of the time saving game state, and the performance effect before and after the time saving game state ends can be improved.

(Special time-saving production processing of the production control unit)
Using FIG. 73, the special time-saving production process of the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of a special time-saving production process in the production control unit 130m.

First, in step E750-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the game is currently in the time saving game state. If it is not in the time-saving game state, the process is moved to step E750-2, and if it is in the time-saving game state, a special time-saving production (RWM clear described later is not performed (stationary) Suggests RWM clear denial performance, activation counter display suggested by counting down the number of fluctuations until transition to a special time-saving game state) are not executed, and this special time-saving system performance processing is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variable effect has been started in step E750-2. If the variable production has not started, the process is moved to step E750-16, and if the variable production has started, in step E750-3, whether the RWM is cleared when the power is turned on (power-on designation command was received). If the RWM clear has been performed, the process proceeds to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negative effect is not executed, and if the RWM clear has been performed, the process proceeds to step E750-4.

In step E750-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a history of executing a jackpot game from when the power is turned on until now. If there is a history of big wins, the process is moved to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negative effect is not executed, and if there is no history of big wins, the process is moved to step E750-5.

Sub CPU130a, in step E750-5, determines whether or not the number of fluctuations until transition to the special time-saving gaming state is within a predetermined number (here, 100 times). If it is not within the predetermined number, the process moves to step E750-16 assuming that the special time-saving effect (RWM clear negative effect, activation counter display) is not executed, and if it is within the predetermined number, to step E750-6. transfer processing.

In step E750-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations since power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the first number (here, 50 times). If the number of fluctuations is not the first number, the process proceeds to step E750-10, and if the number of fluctuations is the first number, in step E750-7, whether or not the RWM clear negative effect is executed and activated. Whether or not to display the counter is determined by lottery (for example, a ratio of 1/2).

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E750-8 whether or not it is decided to execute the RWM clear negative effect or the activation counter display. If it is determined not to execute the RWM clear denial effect or activation counter display, the process is shifted to step E750-16, and if it is determined to execute the RWM clear denial effect or activation counter display, step E750-9. , the effect execution command corresponding to the determination result is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, an effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing a special time-saving effect (RWM clear negative effect and/or activation counter display) is performed.

In step E750-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations since the power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of fluctuations is not the second number, the process proceeds to step E750-16, and if the number of fluctuations is the second number, the presence or absence of execution of the RWM clear denial effect and the presence or absence of display of the activation counter are determined. decide. Specifically, when the RWM clear denial effect has not been executed, it is decided to execute the RWM clear denial effect, and when the display of the activation counter has not been executed, it is determined to execute the display of the activation counter.

The sub CPU 130a sets an effect execution command corresponding to the determination result in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, an effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing a special time-saving effect (RWM clear negative effect and/or activation counter display) is performed.

In step E750-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations since power-on is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of fluctuations is the second number, the process is moved to step E750-15, and if the number of fluctuations is not the second number, in step E750-14, whether the transition from the normal time-saving gaming state to the production mode A It is determined whether or not (whether or not all the fluctuation effects corresponding to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol have been completed). If the normal time-saving game state is shifted to the production mode A, the process is moved to step E750-15, and if the normal time-saving game state is not changed to the production mode A, the process is moved to step E750-16.

The sub CPU 130a sets the activation counter display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in step E750-15. Thereby, the production execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the special time-saving production (here, display of the activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect symbol has been stop-displayed (whether or not the symbol determination command has been received). When the production design is stop-displayed, the process is moved to step E750-17, and when the production design is not stop-displayed, the special time-saving system production process of this time is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E750-17 whether or not the activation counter is currently being displayed. If the activation counter is not being displayed, this special time-saving effect processing is terminated, and if the activation counter is being displayed, in step E750-18, the activation counter subtraction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. do. As a result, an activation counter subtraction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for subtracting the value of the activation counter is performed. After completing this process, the special time-saving production process of this time is terminated.

In this way, during the execution of the variable performance for the predetermined number of times (before the special time-saving gaming state is activated) the RWM clear (clear the number of fluctuations) is not executed when the power is turned on. It is possible to execute an RWM clear denial effect suggesting that it is (deferred). Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the special time-saving game state occurs with reference to the number of fluctuations of the previous day, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a plurality of execution timings of the RWM clear denial effect are set, and if executed at any timing, it will not be executed again at other timings. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation with respect to the timing at which the RWM clear denial effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to display the activation counter suggested by counting down the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time-saving gaming state (activation countdown effect can be executed). Therefore, the player can grasp the time when the special time-saving game state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, during the time-saving game state, the activation counter is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player's consciousness is directed toward the special time-saving game state in spite of the normal time-saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the activation counter is subtracted at the time of stop of the production pattern where the big hit notice effect and the look-ahead effect are less likely to be executed (started) than at the start of the fluctuation, not at the start of the fluctuation effect where the big hit notice effect and the look-ahead effect are likely to be executed (started). Since (countdown) is performed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Instead of subtracting (counting down) the activation counter at the time of stopping the performance pattern, the subtraction (counting down) of the activation counter may be performed at the start of the variable performance. In this case, the effect pattern 70a may start to fluctuate and the activation counter may be decremented until it completely shifts to high-speed fluctuation (becomes constant speed), or fluctuation such as floating in the effect pattern in the variable effect. The scrolling (fluctuation) may be performed after the pre-movement is performed, and the activation counter may be decremented before the pre-variation movement is completed.

(Example of effect when prefetch effect is executed during normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 74, an effect example when the look-ahead effect is executed during the normal game state will be described. Here, it is assumed that the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), the game ball enters the first starting port 45 during the variable display of the first special symbol to be lost (execution of variable effect), and the first reserved number changes from "1" to " 2”, the number in the first pending number display area 70E increases from “1” to “2”, and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B shows a prefetch effect (here, icon change effect, A white icon (suspended icon HI) to be announced for the look-ahead zone effect) is additionally displayed. At the lower left corner of the screen of the first image display device 70, the number of games GK, which is the number of variable displays (variable effects) performed after the power is turned on or after the jackpot game ends, is displayed.

Next, when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with a losing roll ("814"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI is erased.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that becomes a loss is started, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts. , the number in the first pending number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C. , and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

At this time, the icon change effect is started, and the pending icon shift-displayed on the first display portion 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). Further, the look-ahead zone effect is started, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and a blue zone image ZG is displayed. Next, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 74(d), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol are stopped and displayed with a losing dot ("531"), and the symbol displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed. The icon TI is erased.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, as shown in FIG. , the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C. is displayed as the icon TI, and changes to a red icon (special icon). In addition, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 74(f), the left and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a state where the ready-to-win state is formed, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. The icon display area 70C is hidden (erased), and the look-ahead zone effect is interrupted.

Then, when the final phase of the SP ready-to-win effect (execution timing of the effect of deciding whether to lose or not) is reached, the success effect of deciding is started, and the effect of the ally character C2 launching a final attack on the enemy character C3 is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and the voice output device 9 outputs an announcement sound of "kyuin kyuin" (in this case, a big win is given). is notified).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the production position to the standby position and the determined success production ends, as shown in FIG. At "555"), the game is temporarily stopped, the look-ahead zone effect is restarted, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed. After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed with a special appearance ("555") common to the small hit and the big hit, and the special pattern TZ indicates the small hit. A stop display is made at a big winning number ("555") that does not include "V". Further, when the look-ahead zone effect ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change effect ends.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, it is determined that the final phase of the SP ready-to-win performance (execution timing of the performance for determining whether or not it is a failure) is reached, and the failure performance is started and the friend character C2 becomes the enemy character. A production that loses to C3 is performed. After that, when a character screen of "defeat" is displayed to inform that the player has failed and the failure performance is completed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed with a reach-losing result (for example, "565"). become.

In this way, when a big win is achieved in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectations of the player when the jackpot game is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Production example when a variable production is executed after transitioning to rush battle mode)
With reference to FIG. 75, an effect example when the variable effect is executed after shifting to the rush battle mode will be described.

When the ending of the third jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 64(a), a time-saving rush effect is executed to suggest a time-saving game state, and a caution for calling the player's attention is executed. Arousal notification is executed. Specifically, a forget-to-take caution image TG is displayed to warn about forgetting to take a card (storage medium) capable of specifying the balance of the valuable value from the lending device that performs game ball lending communication with the gaming machine 1. .

After that, when the display period of the forget-to-take warning image has passed, as shown in FIG. 75(b), an addiction warning image NG is displayed to warn against excessive immersion in the game. Then, when the ending time of the third jackpot game has passed, 7 times is set as the second time saving number of times (J2), the first reservation number (U1) is "2" and the second reservation number (U2) is " 0” state, the normal time-saving game state is started, and the rush battle mode background image, the first right-handed image MG1 prompting to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a, and the second time-saving number of times (J2) The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "remaining 7 times". Also, the number of games GK is displayed as "0". In other words, the first time saving number of times (J1), the third time saving number of times (J3) and the remaining number of small hits (Z) are not displayed.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. The number in the display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the icon is instantly displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, because of the variable display of the first special symbol, the remaining number of time reduction image KG indicating the remaining number of the second number of time reductions (J2) maintains the state of "remaining 7 times". However, since the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is used, the rush battle ready-to-reach effect is not executed.

At this time, when three game balls win the second starting port 47 and the second reservation number increases from "0" to "3", as shown in FIG. 75(d), the second reservation number display area The number 70F increases from "0" to "3", and three white icons (suspended icon HI) are additionally displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D.

Then, when the fluctuation time has passed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. do. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Thereafter, when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 75(f), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the second reservation The number in the display area 70F is decreased from "3" to "2", the three pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed. It is displayed as an icon TI. In addition, the time saving remaining number image KG changes from "remaining 7 times" to "6 times". Also, the number of games GK is incremented by 1 to become "1".

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 75(g), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a state where the ready-to-win effect is formed, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 75(h), a rush battle ready-to-reach production is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 battle, and the second reserved icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are started. is hidden (erased). At this time, a character image of "first battle" indicating the number of executions of rush battle ready-to-win effect is displayed.

At this time, two game balls enter the second starting port 47 and the second reservation number increases from "2" to "4", but the second reservation icon display area 70D is hidden (erased). Therefore, additional display of the pending icon is not performed.

After that, when it comes to the final phase of the rush battle ready-to-win production (execution timing of the production to decide whether or not to lose), the decision failure production is started, and the production that the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3 is performed. As shown in i), a character screen of "defeated" is displayed to notify that the player has lost.

After that, when the fluctuation time has passed and the second special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. do. Also, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, every time the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is started, effects such as those shown in FIGS. Along with the subtraction, the number of the character image indicating the number of executions of the rush battle reach effect is also updated.

In this way, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the normal time-saving rush effect is executed during the ending of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the normal time-saving game state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, right-handed notification is performed from before the normal time-saving game state occurs (during the jackpot game). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by hitting left when the normal time-saving game state occurs, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, regardless of whether or not there is a pending memory, the production mode (here, rush battle mode) according to the time-saving state is set according to the ending of the jackpot game, and the production is performed. The background image corresponding to the mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the normal time-saving game state has occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the normal time-saving rush effect is executed in a state in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are hidden. Therefore, it is possible to digest the time-saving state with a new feeling without worrying about the result of the previous variable presentation, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when generating a normal time-saving gaming state, after performing an attention-raising effect (displaying a forget-to-take caution image TG, displaying a immersive caution image NG) that calls attention to the player, an effect according to the time-saving state ( Background image change, display of time saving remaining number image KG, right hitting notification, variation effect according to time saving state, output of BGM corresponding to rush battle mode, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to effectively call the player's attention.

Also, at the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, even if the customer is waiting for a customer with no pending memory, the BGM corresponding to the production mode for the time-saving state is audibly output, but is muted after a predetermined period of time. audible output is turned off). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the performance effect is drastically reduced immediately even in the customer waiting state with no reservation memory, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when it is in a customer waiting state at the start of the normal time-saving game state after shifting from the jackpot game, the BGM corresponding to the production mode of the normal time-saving game state is not audibly output and is muted. good too. In this case, when a game ball enters the starting port from the customer waiting state, a suspended memory is generated and when the variable performance is started, BGM corresponding to the performance mode of the normal time-saving game state is audibly output. good.

In addition, although the attention calling performance is performed during the ending of the jackpot game, the attention calling performance may be performed during the ending of the jackpot game and during the normal time-saving game state, or immediately after the start of the normal time-saving state. (During the first variable effect), the attention calling effect may be performed, or in the attention calling effect, the display of the attention image TG that has been forgotten to be taken and the display of the attention image NG may be displayed in order (either may appear first).

In addition, in the variation performance of the first special symbol executed when there is no second suspension memory and there is the first suspension memory at the start of the normal time-saving game state, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner. However, only the variable display of the special symbol TZ may be performed without performing the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the fact that the second number of time reductions (J2) is not subtracted, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the variation performance of the first special symbol executed when there is no second suspension memory but there is the first suspension memory at the start of the normal time-saving game state, the special symbol TZ is performed without executing the variable display of the performance symbol 70a. If only the variable display is performed, if it is a loss, a relatively short variation time (such as shortened variation or ultra-shortened variation) will be used to perform the variation effect, and if it is a hit, a longer variation time will be used. A special performance may be performed.

In addition, although the right hitting notification is not performed during the time saving rush performance, by displaying the first right hitting image MG1, the right hitting information is always performed from the jackpot game to the normal time saving game state. may

(Example of production in the case of a big hit in the final fluctuation production of rush battle mode)
With reference to FIG. 76, a description will be given of an effect example in the case of a big win in the final variable effect of the rush battle mode.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), the fluctuation time in the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol one before the final round in the rush battle mode has passed, and the second special symbol stops at the losing special symbol. When displayed, as shown in FIG. 76(a), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with a losing dot ("676"). Also, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol, which is the final round of the rush battle mode, is started, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started. , the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C. Then, one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, as the time saving final change, the time saving remaining number image KG changes from "one remaining time" to "last", and the right hitting saves the second reserved memory (increases the second reserved number). A promotion image SG is displayed. This storage promoting image SG is an image displayed so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the variable display of the production pattern 70a as much as possible, and is a count image (here, "09 : 99”) is displayed, and a countdown display is performed according to the passage of time. In addition, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

After that, when one game ball wins the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. A white icon (holding icon HI) is additionally displayed in the second display portion 70D2 of the icon display area 70D. Since the look-ahead result of the second pending memory (special figure determination information) stored at this time is a big hit, the lighting effect at the time of winning is started and the top lamp 10b lights yellow, and the sound effect "picon" from the voice output device 9 ♪” is output.

Also, when two game balls win the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. A white icon (holding icon HI) is additionally displayed in each of the third display portion 70D3 and the fourth display portion 70D4 of the icon display area 70D. In addition, the characters of the second retention prompting image SG2, "Play right and save," change to "MAX!!" indicating that the second retention number (U2) has reached the upper limit ("4"). After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, the count image of the retention promoting image SG becomes "00:00" and the countdown ends, and then the retention promoting image SG is erased, as shown in FIG.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 76(f), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a state where the ready-to-win effect is formed, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Further, when a predetermined time has passed, the development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 76(g), the final battle reach effect in which the friend character C2 and the enemy character C3 have a final battle is started, and the second reserved icon display area 70D. And the icon display area 70C is hidden (erased). At this time, a character image of "final battle" indicating the number of executions of the battle reach effect is displayed. In addition, the number of games GK is hidden as the development effect is executed.

Thereafter, at the final phase of the special SP ready-to-win production (execution timing of the production for deciding whether or not the game is lost), the decision success production is started, and the production for the ally character C2 to launch a final attack on the enemy character C3 is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 76(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the presentation position, and the voice output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "kyuin kyuin", and the final attack is directed at the enemy character. A hit is reported.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the effect position to the standby position and the successful effect is completed, as shown in FIG. in some cases). Then, when the fluctuation time has passed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit special symbol, as shown in FIG. do. Also, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, in the last variable effect in the normal time-saving game state, the retention promotion effect (display of retention promotion image SG, countdown display) that encourages accumulating the second retention memory (increasing the second retention number) by hitting to the right is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to reliably store the second reserved memory before the time-saving gaming state ends, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

In addition, in the accumulation promotion effect, the countdown display is performed, so that the player can be strongly conscious of accumulating the second reservation memory (increasing the second reservation number) by hitting to the right, and the player can lose. It is possible to suppress suffering from

In addition, when the second reservation number (U2) reaches the upper limit in the storage promotion effect, the characters "Save with right stroke" are displayed in a display mode indicating that the second reservation number (U2) has reached the upper limit (" MAX!!”). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from shooting the game ball wastefully, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest in the game.

In addition, in the rush battle mode, which is the normal time-saving game state, when the last second special symbol variation display that ends the normal time-saving game state is executed, the final battle ready-to-win effect is always executed. there is Therefore, even if the normal time-saving game state ends due to a loss, the player can be sufficiently entertained, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, during the time-saving game state in which it is easy to win the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second reservation memory (special figure determination information) based on the winning to the second starting port 47 is a small hit. In this case, it is possible to execute a win-time lighting effect (prefetching effect) for the reserved memory that is the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the expectation of the player as to whether or not the small winning game that may lead to the big winning game is executed in the specific game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the countdown display is executed in the retention promotion effect, but the gauge image is displayed for a period shorter than the time until the reach effect starts, and the length of the gauge is shortened according to the passage of time. You may make it perform the display production|presentation which carries out. In addition, a specific light emitting means is lit for a period shorter than the time until the reach effect starts, and the light emission color changes over time (for example, blue lighting → yellow lighting → red lighting). You may make it perform the light emission production|presentation.

(Example of production when the normal time-saving game state ends)
With reference to FIG. 77, an example of effect when the number of times of time saving (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the normal time saving game state ends will be described.

Here, along with the start of the second special symbol loss variation display, which is the time-saving final variation, a series of performances that make it appear as if one variation performance is being executed over a plurality of variation displays is started. As shown in a), it is assumed that the final battle ready-to-win effect that results in a loss is being executed.

After that, when it comes to the final phase of the final battle ready-to-win effect (execution timing of the effect of deciding whether to lose or not), the decision failure effect is started, and the effect that the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3 is performed. As shown in b), a character screen of "lost" is displayed to notify that the player has lost.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the decision-failure effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 77(c), a result display showing the result of the game during a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues from the first big win game is displayed. will be Specifically, the number of executions of the jackpot game (here, "1 win") and the total number of payout balls (here, 450pt) are displayed as the match result. In addition, the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a reach-losing result ("565"), and when the stop time elapses, the time-saving game state ends with four second holding memories remaining, and the normal game state is shifted to the first. The right shot image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect of losing) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, FIG. 77 (d) , variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3". Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 69(e), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a losing dot ("749"). In addition, the number of games GK is kept hidden during the period when the result display is performed, and even if the variable effect is executed, the number of games is added only internally, and it cannot be grasped visually. state.

Then, when the stop time elapses and the second variation display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect of loss) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started. , as shown in FIG. 77(f), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2". Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 77(g), the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a losing dot ("349").

Furthermore, when the stop time has passed and the third variation display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect of loss) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started. , the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1". Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed as a result of losing.

After that, when the fourth (last) second special symbol variation display (losing variation effect) based on the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, the result is displayed. continues, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "1" to "0". Then, when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 77(h), the special symbol TZ is stopped with a losing roll ("749"), and when the stop time elapses, the result display ends and the above-described series of effects is performed. ends.

After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 77 (i), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. be. At this time, an effect mode A background image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, and a left-hand shot image HG prompting the player to shoot the game ball is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a. Also, the number of games GK is displayed again in a state after addition.

In addition, here is an example in which the normal time-saving game state ends when it is in rush battle mode, but the production mode is a wild dance mode, a super-random mode, and an infinite mode When the normal time-saving game state ends Even if there is, the progress is basically as shown in FIGS. 77(a) to 77(i).

In this way, from the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the time-saving final variation, to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state, one variation production is performed. A series of productions are executed to make it look as if the Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to experience a novel performance that does not make the player strongly aware of the number of remaining reserved second special symbols, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol in the series of effects, only the special symbol TZ is displayed without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. . Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize a plurality of variable performances as a series of performances, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the series of performances.

In addition, by performing the result display over the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second special symbol remaining reservation (second retention memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state from the variation display of the second special symbol that is the time saving final variation. , it becomes easy to recognize a plurality of variable performances as a series of performances, and the performance effect of the series of performances can be improved.

In addition, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when shifting to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of the series of effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from shooting game balls uselessly, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, a series of productions are executed from the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the time-saving final variation, to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. However, in the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation of the time saving, the second special based on the remaining reservation (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state without starting a series of effects A series of effects may be executed over the variable display of the symbols. In this case, it is preferable to perform a special SP ready-to-win effect and a result display in the first variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state.

(Production example 1 in the case of a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved at the time of transition to the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 78, an effect example 1 in the case of winning a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state will be described.

Here, along with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the time-saving final variation, a series of effects are started to make it look as if one variable effect is being executed over a plurality of variable displays, as shown in FIG. ), it is assumed that the final battle ready-to-win production that results in a loss is being executed. At this time, the prize-winning light-emitting effect with the second reserve memory (minor win) as the announcement target continues, and the top lamp 10b emits yellow light.

After that, when the final phase of the final battle ready-to-win effect (execution timing of the effect of deciding whether to lose or not) is reached, the decision failure effect is started, and the effect that the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3 is performed. As shown in b), a character screen of "lost" is displayed to notify that the player has lost.

Then, when a predetermined time elapses, the decision failure performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 78(c), the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues from the first small winning game or big winning game is shown. A result is displayed. Specifically, the number of executions of the jackpot game (here, "1 win") and the total number of payout balls (here, 450pt) are displayed as the match result. Also, the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed at the reach-losing result ("565").

However, since the remaining reserve (second reserve memory) of the second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state includes a small hit, the result display executed here is the time of normal game state transition. It is a special result display (a kind of look-ahead effect) that suggests that a small hit is included in the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of star images YG are displayed at positions avoiding the character images of the result display. Then, when the stop time elapses, the normal time-saving game state ends while the four second reservation memories remain, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the first right shot image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect of losing) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, FIG. 78 (d) , variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3". Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 78(e), the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a losing dot ("749"). In addition, the number of games GK is kept hidden during the period when the result display is performed, and even if the variable effect is executed, the number of games is added only internally, and it cannot be grasped visually. state.

Then, when the second variation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state (second retention memory) is started, Fig. 78 (f ), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F is decreased from "3" to "2". At this time, a resurrection effect is started, a character image saying "Not yet~!"

Then, when the ally character C2 unleashes the final attack, the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the presentation position, and the voice output device 9 emits a notification sound of "kyuin kyuin", as shown in FIG. 78(g). is output (here, it is informed that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol of this time will be a small hit). At this time, the top lamp 10b is extinguished, and the light-emitting performance at the time of winning ends.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the resurrection performance is completed, the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops at a special dot ("555") common to the small win and the big win, and temporarily stops. When the time elapses, as shown in FIG. 78(h), the production symbol 70a stops displaying a special symbol ("555") common to the small winning and the big winning, and the special symbol TZ shows "V" indicating the small winning. ” is stopped and displayed with a small hit (“5V5”). Also, the number of games GK is displayed again in a state after addition.

Then, when the stop time elapses, the series of effects described above ends, the opening of the small winning game is started, and as shown in FIG. At the same time, a first right-handed shot image MG1 is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a to prompt the shooting of the game ball.

After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 78(j), instead of the "BONUS" image, a second right-handed shot image MG2 is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a to prompt the player to shoot the game ball.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed, at the opening of the jackpot game, a "jackpot" image indicating that the jackpot game is to be executed is displayed, and a game ball is to be shot to the right side of the game area 5a. A first right shot image MG1 prompting is displayed. After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a second right-handed shot image MG2 is displayed instead of the "jackpot" image to prompt the shooting of the game ball on the right side of the game area 5a.

In this way, when the second special symbol remaining reserve (second reserve memory stored during the specific game state) at the time of transition to the normal game state includes a small win as a result of the look-ahead, It is possible to execute a special result display (prefetching effect) that confirms that it will be a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security while giving the player a sense of loss through the result display, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when a small win is achieved in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (the second reserve memory stored during the specific game state), it becomes a big win. The first movable member 73a operates in the same manner as the case. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce that the small winning game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a small win is achieved in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (the second reserve memory stored during the specific game state), it becomes a big win. The same notification sound (“queuing queuing”) is output from the voice output device 9 as in the case. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce that the small winning game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case of a small hit in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second retention memory stored during the specific game state), the effect symbol 70a The same number (a special number with three same numbers) as in the case of a big hit is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the players aware that the small winning game leads to the big winning game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the second special symbol remaining hold (second hold memory stored during the specific game state) at the time of transition to the normal game state contains a small hit, the special result display is executed. However, even if the second special symbol remaining reserved at the time of transition to the normal game state includes a big win, a special result display in the same display mode as in the case of a small win. may be executed. Also, the special result display may be performed in different display modes depending on whether the game is a small win or a big win.

In addition, in the case of a small hit in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second retention memory stored during the specific game state), the effect symbol 70a As a jackpot, the same number (special number with three same numbers) is displayed. You may make it differ whether a character or a decoration image) is added.

In addition, if the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserve memory stored during the specific game state) includes a small hit, a small hit game (= Although the same special result display is performed irrespective of the type of stop special figure data), different modes of special result display may be performed according to the type of small winning game.

(Production example 2 in the case of a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved at the time of transition to the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 79, an example 2 of effect in the case of winning a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state will be described.

Here, along with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the time-saving final variation, a series of effects are started that make it appear as if one variable effect is being executed over a plurality of variable displays, as shown in FIG. ), it is assumed that the final battle ready-to-win production that results in a loss is being executed. At this time, the prize-winning light-emitting effect with the second reserve memory (minor win) as the announcement target continues, and the top lamp 10b emits yellow light.

After that, when the final phase of the final battle reach performance (execution timing of the performance of deciding whether to lose or not) is reached, the look-ahead determination success performance is started, and the performance of the ally character C2 delivering the final attack to the enemy character C3 is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, and the voice output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "kyun kyuin" (here, after this, It is notified that the variation display of the second special symbol executed second is a small win).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the determined success performance ends, as shown in FIG. will be reported. Then, when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 79(d), the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a reach-losing roll ("565") while the character image "Victory" continues to be displayed. When the stop time elapses, the time-saving game state ends while the four second reservation memories remain, the state shifts to the normal game state, and the first right hitting image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of losing) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, FIG. 79 (e) As shown in , while the character image "Victory" continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started and the number of the second pending number display area 70F is reduced from "4" to "3". .

Next, when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 79(f), the character image "Victory" continues to be displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped with a losing roll ("938"). . After that, when the stop time elapses, the second variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of the small win) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, As shown in FIG. 79(g), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the display of the character image "Victory" continues, and the number of the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "2 ”.

After that, when the fluctuation time elapses, the production pattern 70a temporarily stops at a special outcome ("555") common to the small hit and the big hit, and when the temporary stop time elapses, as shown in FIG. 79(h), the production The symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a special symbol ("555") common to the small winning and the big winning, and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a small winning symbol ("5V5") including "V" indicating the small winning. . Also, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Then, when the stop time elapses, the series of effects described above is terminated, the opening of the small winning game is started, and as shown in FIG. At the same time, a first right-handed shot image MG1 is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a to prompt the shooting of the game ball. After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 79(j), instead of the "BONUS" image, a second right-handed shot image MG2 is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a to prompt the player to shoot the game ball.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed, at the opening of the jackpot game, a "jackpot" image indicating that the jackpot game is to be executed is displayed, and a game ball is to be shot to the right side of the game area 5a. A first right shot image MG1 prompting is displayed. After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a second right-handed shot image MG2 is displayed instead of the "jackpot" image to prompt the shooting of the game ball on the right side of the game area 5a.

In this way, when the variation performance related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes a small hit or a big hit, even if the final variation performance of the time saving game state is a loss, look ahead As a kind of production, a battle production (forecast determination success production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected variable performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the performance mode of the opening performance when the small win game is executed is made different from the performance mode of the opening performance when the big win game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is a small winning game or a big winning game from the opening effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

78 and 79, when the small winning game is executed and when the big winning game is executed, the contents of the variation production are the same, but when the small winning game is executed and the big winning game You may vary the production contents of the variable production when is executed. In this case, the time during which the first movable member 73a is in the production position may differ between when the small winning game is executed and when the big winning game is executed, or the light emission mode of the first movable member 73a may be changed. can be different.

(Example of production when small winning game is executed in super wild dance mode)
With reference to FIG. 80, an example of effect when a small winning game is executed in the super wild dance mode will be described.

Here, as a result of the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol executed in the super wild dance mode, the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first small winning game is started, and the first small winning game is performed. Assume that the opening has started.

When the opening of the first small winning game ends and the opening and closing game for changing the state of the first big winning opening opening and closing member 51 and the specific area opening and closing member 52 is started, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the specific area A third right-handed image MG3 prompting the player to shoot a game ball aiming at 53 is displayed, and a limit notification effect corresponding to the remaining period of the open/close game (remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is displayed. be started. Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size increases as the time passes. is done. At this time, the number of games GK is hidden in response to the start of the small winning game.

When the game ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 at the timing immediately after that, as shown in FIG. be done. Specifically, a passage notification image TH made up of the letter "V" is displayed, and a passage notification sound "vacuum♪" is output from the voice output device 9. FIG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(c), the end timing of the opening/closing game (state conversion of the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52), that is, until the end of the small winning game (conversion game) The passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues. After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the big winning game (1V big winning game) starts, the big winning game (1V big winning game) is executed as shown in FIG. 80(d). is displayed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 80(e), a round game is started and an effect during the jackpot is executed. In addition, the total number of paid-out balls "660pt" corresponding to the total number of game media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and every time the game balls enter the second big winning hole 56 during the 1st V big winning game, the total number of balls is displayed. The number of balls to be paid out is updated.

On the other hand, when a predetermined time (eight seconds in this case) elapses without the game ball passing through (winning) the specific area 53 after the start of the small winning game, the count image CG changes to "01" as shown in FIG. 80(f). :99" and displayed in a size larger than that in FIG. 80(a). Immediately after that, when the game ball passes (enters) the specific area 53, as shown in FIG. The device 9 outputs a passage notification sound "vacuum♪".

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(c), the end timing of the opening/closing game (state conversion of the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52), that is, until the end of the small winning game (conversion game) The passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues. After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the big winning game (1V big winning game) starts, the big winning game (1V big winning game) is executed as shown in FIG. 80(d). is displayed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 80(e), a round game is started and an effect during the jackpot is executed. In addition, the total number of paid-out balls "660pt" corresponding to the total number of game media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and every time the game balls enter the second big winning hole 56 during the 1st V big winning game, the total number of balls is displayed. The number of balls to be paid out is updated.

Further, when the game ball does not pass through (win) the specific area 53 and the remaining time of the open/close game becomes "0", as shown in FIG. The displayed count image CG becomes "00:00". In addition, at the ending of the first small winning game, a disappointing notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game), and "sorry". A character image and a fainted character are displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs a disappointing sound effect "chu-n".

After that, when the ending of the first small hit game ends, as shown in FIG. 80 (h), the number of remaining small hits (Z) is reduced to 1 time, and the production mode is super wild dance mode or infinite Rank down from mode to boisterous mode. Then, the wild dance mode background corresponding to the wild dance mode is displayed, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed again. In addition, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the time saving remaining number image KG is also redisplayed. Also, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. The number in the display area 70F is decreased from "4" to "3", the four pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed. It is displayed as an icon TI. In addition, the time saving remaining number image KG changes from "remaining 80 times" to "79 times". In addition, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

In this way, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 in the small winning game (more specifically, the opening and closing game), a passing notification effect indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 is executed. there is Therefore, even if it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the first big winning hole 50 (around the specific area 53), the player can be assured that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (that the jackpot game is executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 in the small hit game (more specifically the opening and closing game), regardless of the timing of passing through this specific area 53, the small hit game (more specifically the opening and closing game) The passage notification effect continues until it ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player cannot perceive the passing notification effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the small hit game (conversion game), the limit notification effect corresponding to the remaining time of the opening and closing game (remaining time that the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately prompt the player to shoot the game ball so as to pass through the specific area 53, thereby avoiding the inconvenience of missing the chance of winning the big winning game.

In addition, depending on the remaining time of the opening and closing game (the remaining time that the game ball can pass through the specific area 53), the notification mode of the limit notification effect (the number of the count, the size of the count image) is highly appealing to the player. change). Therefore, it is possible to increase the appeal to the player as time passes, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of losing the chance to win a big winning game.

In addition, in the limit notification effect, a countdown display is performed that allows the remaining time of the open/close game to be specified, so that the player can accurately grasp the time when there is a chance to win a jackpot game, and the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, in the small winning game (conversion game), when the execution period of the opening and closing game passes without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, the game ball is specified during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game) A disappointing notification effect for notifying that the area 53 has not been passed is executed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the big winning game has not been obtained, and to avoid the inconvenience of the player feeling dissatisfied with the result of the small winning game becoming unknown.

In addition, in the small winning game (opening and closing game) executed as a result of the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) executed in the super wild dance mode (the same applies to the infinite mode), the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53. When the opening/closing game execution period elapses and the small winning game ends, the remaining number of small winnings is reduced to 1 when the small winning special symbol is stopped, and the remaining number of small winnings is 1. It is designed to be ranked down to the corresponding Ranbu mode. Therefore, by setting the production mode according to the remaining number of small hits, the game conditions are set so that there is no discrepancy with the recognition of the player when the jackpot game or the small hit game is executed after that. It is possible to improve interest.

Also, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small hit game executed during the time saving game state, the remaining number of small hits (Z) is not "0" (the number of time saving is also "0" If not), the time-saving gaming state continues. Therefore, even if a game ball cannot be shot during a small winning game due to a malfunction of the shooting device or a ball clogging, etc., the player will not suffer an extreme disadvantage, and the interest in the game will be reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, although the limit notification effect is the effect corresponding to the remaining period of the opening and closing game, it may be the effect corresponding to the remaining time until the first big winning opening opening and closing member 51 is finally closed, or the small winning game. It is also possible to produce an effect according to the remaining time of the .

In addition, the countdown display is executed as a limit notification effect, but the gauge image is displayed for the remaining period of the opening and closing game, and the display effect is such that the length of the gauge is shortened according to the passage of time. may be executed. In addition, a specific light emitting means is lit for the remaining period of the opening and closing game, and a light emitting effect such as changing the light emitting color according to the passage of time (for example, blue lighting → yellow lighting → red lighting) is executed. may

In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the specific region 53 in the small winning game executed during the time saving game state, but the time saving game state is continued, the remaining number of time saving image KG can grasp the remaining number of times ( However, it may be displayed such that the remaining number of times cannot be grasped (unknown), such as "??? times".

In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small winning game executed during the time-saving game state but the time-saving game state is continued, a character image such as ``May be a boisterous dance mode'' is displayed. , a suggestive effect suggesting that the super wild dance mode or the infinite mode will not continue may be executed.

(Example of production when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small hit game in Ranbu mode)
With reference to FIG. 81, an example of an effect when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small winning game in the boisterous dance mode will be described.

Here, as a result of the variation display (variation performance) of the second special symbol executed in the wild dance mode, the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first small winning game is started, and the opening of the first small winning game. is assumed to have started. At this time, the number of games GK is hidden in response to the start of the small winning game.

When the opening of the first small winning game is finished and the opening/closing game for changing the state of the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52 is started, as shown in FIG. 81(a), the specific area A third right-handed image MG3 prompting the player to shoot a game ball aiming at 53 is displayed, and a limit notification effect corresponding to the remaining period of the open/close game (remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is displayed. be started. Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size increases as the time passes. is done.

After that, when the game ball does not pass through (win) the specific area 53 and the remaining time of the open/close game becomes "0", as shown in FIG. The displayed count image CG becomes "00:00". In addition, at the ending of the first small winning game, a disappointing notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game), and "sorry". A character image and a fainted character are displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs a disappointing sound effect "chu-n".

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 81(c), an end suggestion effect is executed to suggest that the time-saving gaming state is to end. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the shutter image SY is closed so as to shield the background image, the "sorry" character image, and the fainted character, and when the ending period ends, as shown in FIG. The mode special symbol TZ "5V5" is redisplayed, and the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F are redisplayed.

After that, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of loss) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, FIG. 81 (e) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started and the number of the second pending number display area 70F is reduced from "4" to "3". do. It should be noted that the number of games GK remains hidden during the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if the variable effect is executed, the number of games is added only internally, and the number of games can be grasped visually. It is in a state where it cannot be done.

It should be noted that during the period in which the variable display based on the second special symbol remaining hold (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot announcement effect and the look-ahead The performance is not executed.

Further, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 81(f), the special symbol TZ is stopped with a losing roll ("346") while the shutter image SY (shielding image) is continuously displayed. . Thereafter, the variable display and stop of the special symbol TZ in the state where the shutter image SY (shielding image) is displayed until the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes 0. Display is repeated.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol TZ when the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second retention storage) becomes 0, the shutter image is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (g). While the SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a losing roll ("559").

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ elapses, as shown in FIG. 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed, and a left-handed shot image HG prompting the player to shoot a game ball is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a. Also, the number of games GK is displayed again in a state after addition.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the remaining reserved (first reserved storage) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserved number display area The number of 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. be done.

In this way, in the small hit game (opening and closing game) executed as a result of the fluctuation performance (variation display of special symbols) executed in the boisterous dance mode (including the case of the rush battle mode), the game ball moves through the specific area 53 When the execution period of the opening and closing game passes without passing and the small winning game ends, the number of remaining small winnings is subtracted to 0 when the small winning special symbol stops and the time saving game state ends. The rank is lowered to the production mode A corresponding to the game state (the normal game state is notified). Therefore, a game state is set that does not contradict the player's recognition, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small winning game and the execution period of the opening and closing game passes and the small winning game ends (the time saving game state does not continue), in the normal game state The result display is not executed before something is notified (various effects images corresponding to the effect mode A are displayed). Therefore, the game can be progressed without giving a sense of loss that the player has missed the jackpot game and the time-saving game state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, one variation performance is executed over the variation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state from the variation display of the second special symbol that is the time-saving final variation. A series of productions that make it look as if it is being performed are executed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to experience a novel performance that does not make the player strongly aware of the number of remaining reserved second special symbols, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol in the series of effects, only the special symbol TZ is displayed without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. . Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize a plurality of variable performances as a series of performances, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the series of performances.

In addition, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when shifting to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of the series of effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from shooting game balls uselessly, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

It should be noted that during the period in which the variable display based on the second special symbol remaining hold (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot announcement effect and the look-ahead Instead of setting a state in which the performance is not executed, the execution of the big hit announcement performance may be permitted and the execution of the look-ahead performance may be restricted, or vice versa. In addition, the execution of specific notice effects (for example, win-loss decision effects, jackpot confirmation effects, etc.) among the jackpot notice effects is permitted, and other notice effects (for example, dialogue notice effects, roulette notice effects, cut-in notice effects, etc.) ) may be regulated, or execution of a specific effect (for example, lighting effect at the time of winning a prize, etc.) among the prefetch effects is permitted, and other effects (for example, prefetch zone effects, prefetch countdown effects, etc.) etc.) may be restricted.

(Production example when special time-saving production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 82, a description will be given of an effect example in the case where a special time-saving effect is executed due to RWM clear not being performed at the start of power supply. In addition, special time-saving effects include RWM clear denial effects that suggest that RWM clearing is not performed (stationary), activation counter display that suggests the number of fluctuations until transition to a special time-saving game state, etc. be done.

Here, the power supply is stopped (power OFF) during the normal game state, and the power supply is restarted ( After the control state of the game is restored at the time of power ON), the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbols is executed 48 times.

Then, as shown in FIG. 82(a), as the 49th special symbol fluctuation display after restarting the power supply (restoration of the game control state), the first special symbol is displayed in the normal game state (production mode A). Variable display (variable effect) has been started, "2" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F, and the first reservation icon display area Two pending icons HI are displayed in 70B, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, 49 times is displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started as the variable display of the special symbol that is the 50th time after the power supply is restarted and the remaining 100 times to the special time-saving game state is started, FIG. As shown in c), the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is started, the number of the first reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The two displayed pending icons HI are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 49 times to 50 times.

At this time, when it is determined to perform the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display, as shown in FIG. A notification logo LG including characters of "help time" meaning the game state and a character image of "remaining 66" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations are displayed. Also, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first reserved number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and the reserved icon HI is additionally displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 82(e), the stationary notification character SC and the activation counter display are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the screen so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the effect pattern 70a. be.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 65".

Further, when the first special symbol variable display (fluctuation effect) is started as the 51st special symbol variable display after the restart of the power supply, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are the icons One of them is displayed as the icon TI in shift display toward the display area 70C. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 50 times to 51 times.

Then, the variable display (variable effect) and the stop display of the first special symbol are repeated, and the variable display of the special symbol which is the 60th time after the restart of the power supply and the 10th time since the start of the RWM clear negative effect is performed. As a result, when the stop display is made with the losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. 82(h), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped at the losing dot ("294"). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "55 remaining", and the stationary notification character SC that is executed over 10 times of variable display is displayed. It is erased and the execution of the RWM clear negative effect ends.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed for the 50th time after the power supply is restarted (restoration of the game control state) and the remaining 100 times to the special time-saving game state, the RWM clear denial effect is executed. If it is not determined, when the 100th special pattern variation display is performed after the power supply is resumed, the RWM clear denial effect is executed on the condition that it is not in a special time-saving game state (normal game state). will be determined.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed for the 50th time after the power supply is restarted (restoration of the game control state) and the remaining 100 times until the special time-saving game state is performed, the execution of the activation counter display is determined. If not, when the 100th special pattern variation display is performed after the power supply is resumed, execution of the activation counter display is determined on the condition that it is not in the special time-saving game state (normal game state). will be

In this way, when the RWM clear is not performed at the start of the power supply, the RWM clear is denied during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol that is the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) from the restart of the power supply. An effect (display of stationary notification characters SC) is executed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the game is in a stationary state in which the RWM clear is not performed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the RWM clear denial effect is executed until the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is executed a plurality of times (here, 10 times) from the start of the RWM clear denial effect. Therefore, even if the player misses the start of the RWM clear denial effect, the player can be surely informed that the RWM clear denial effect is being executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

Also, if the RWM clear is not performed at the start of power supply, the activation counter display (special Display of the notification logo LG including characters of "help time" which means a time-saving game state and character images of "remaining 66" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations) is executed. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of times of variable display (variable performance) of the special symbols until the transition to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the character image indicating the number of remaining fluctuations as the activation counter display is made up of numbers only and does not include unit display such as number of times or number of times. As a result, players are more likely to find out what these numbers mean, and by increasing opportunities to see machine model information, they are able to deepen their understanding of the game machine and increase their interest in gaming. can be improved.

In addition, the character image that shows the number of remaining fluctuations as the activation counter display is not at the start of the fluctuation effect, which is likely to execute (start) the big hit notice effect and the prefetch effect. (Start) It is designed to be updated at the time of stop display of the production pattern that is difficult to be started. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the execution timing of the RWM clear denial effect and the execution timing of the activation counter display are set at the same timing (the 50th or 100th time after the power supply is restarted). Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player of the transition time to the special time-saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the execution timing of the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display is during the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) after the power supply is restarted (restoration of the game control state). However, the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display are executed during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times before the transition to the special time-saving game state (for example, 50 times or 100 times before) Alternatively, one of the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display can be changed to a predetermined number of times (the 50th or 100th time) after the power supply is restarted (the control state of the game is restored). ), and the other may be during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol before a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times or 100 times before) before shifting to the special time saving game state. In such a case, it may be executed at a predetermined rate 50 times before shifting to the special time-saving gaming state, and if it has not been executed 50 times before, it may be executed without fail 100 times before.

(Example of production when waiting for customers when transitioning to special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 83, a description will be given of an effect example in the case of a customer waiting state when shifting to a special time-saving game state.

Here, it is assumed that the 496th special symbol variation display (variation effect) has been completed since the end of the jackpot game, and the activation counter display has already been executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83(a), as the 497th special symbol variation display from the end of the jackpot game, the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started, and the first reserved number display area 70E. , "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F, three pending icons HI are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C The icon TI is displayed. Also, 112 times is displayed as the number of games GK, and the activation counter display is "4 remaining".

At this time, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), when the number of remaining fluctuations until the special time-saving game state is reached in response to the start of the variable production, the countdown production is started, and the remaining three times are shown. A number image of "3" is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "3 remaining".

Further, when the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 498th variable display of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 83(c), the effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are displayed in the icon display area Shift display is performed toward 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 112 to 113, and a number image of "2" indicating two remaining games is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 2".

After that, when the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 499th variable display of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot game, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are shown in FIG. is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are displayed in the icon display area Shift display is performed toward 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 113 to 114, and a number image of "1" indicating one remaining game is displayed as a countdown effect.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 1".

Then, when the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 500th special symbol variable display which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. And the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B The icon TI is displayed in a shift manner toward the icon display area 70C. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 114 to 115, and a number image of "0" indicating remaining 0 is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 0". In addition, since the special time-saving game state is started by the stop display of the losing special symbol, the first right-handed image MG1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

Further, when the stop time of the first special symbol elapses, as shown in FIG. 83(i), the customer waiting state is started because the pending memory is "0", which corresponds to the normal game state. The display of the mode A background image and the activation counter display is maintained, and the transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is awaited.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) has passed since the start of the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. A guide image AN is displayed that says "help time is installed" indicating that it is being used. After that, when the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect elapses, the state shown in FIG. 83(j).

In this way, a countdown effect suggesting a shift to the special time-saving gaming state from the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol before the predetermined number of times (here, three times) before the special time-saving gaming state is executed. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp the timing of occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, improve the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the 500th variation display of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol is stopped and the special symbol is stopped. From inside, the first right-handed shot image MG1 is used to inform the right-handed shot. Therefore, it is possible to quickly prompt the player to hit the ball to the right, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, at the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time of the 500th special symbol variation display, which is the specified number of times since the end of the jackpot game, enters the special time-saving game state, the production mode is a special time-saving game. Transitioning to the infinite mode corresponding to the state is awaited. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to visually recognize the stop display of the production pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even if the special time-saving game state is entered, if the customer is waiting, the display of the activation counter display is maintained. It is possible to let the player know what state the is in, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, a guide image AN of "help time installed" indicating that the help time, which is the name of the special time-saving game state, is installed is displayed. Therefore, the player can understand that excessive investment is suppressed by the special time-saving game state and relief can be received, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, instead of displaying the guide image AN saying "Help time installed" throughout the duration of the customer waiting demonstration, for example, a demonstration display of model information (various presentations, character introductions, etc.) is performed. The guidance image AN may be displayed while the model name is being displayed without displaying the guidance image AN during this period, or vice versa. Even in this case, it is preferable not to display the guidance image AN while the manufacturer name is being displayed.

In addition, instead of displaying the guide image AN saying "Help time installed" on the image display device, the surface of the game board (whether inside or outside the game area) or the glass frame 4 is displayed. A part of it may be written as "Help Time Installed", and a guide image AN saying "Help Time Installed" may be displayed on the image display device, along with the surface of the game board, a part of the glass frame 4, etc. may be written as "Equipped with help time".

(Production example when the variable production is executed after the transition to the special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 84, an effect example in the case where the variable effect is executed after the transition from the effect mode A to the special time-saving game state will be described.

Here, as a result of the 500th variation display of the special symbols from the end of the jackpot game, the stop display of the losing special symbols is performed and the special time-saving game state is generated, and the right-handed shot is notified by the first right-handed shot image MG1. shall be done.

In that state, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. The effect is started, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, the number of games GK is increased from 115 to 116.

After that, when the variable display of the second special symbol is lost, as shown in FIG. rush effect) is executed. Specifically, the notification logo LG of the activation counter display that was displayed at the bottom right of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is enlarged, and a character image of "START" indicating the start of the special time-saving gaming state is displayed. , and a fourth shot-to-right image MG4 having a size larger than that of the first shot-to-right image MG1 is displayed.

Then, after a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed, a blackout effect is executed in which the screen is shielded by a dark image, as shown in FIG. 84(c). , As shown in FIG. 84(d), an infinite mode entry display is performed that suggests entry into the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state.

After that, when the display time of the infinite mode rush display has passed and the rush effect of the special time-saving game state ends, the rush effect diagram of the special time-saving game state ends, and the infinite mode background image and the second time-saving number of times (J2) The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "remaining 749 times". Also, the number of games GK is displayed again.

In addition, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the second special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. The effect of the effect mode A corresponding to the state (display of the mode A background image, etc.) continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses and the left production pattern 70a "3" temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. When the fanning effect is performed and the ready-to-win fanning effect period elapses, as shown in FIG. Immediately after that, the medium pattern is temporarily stopped at "3".

When the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has passed and the second special symbol is stop-displayed as the big hit special symbol, as shown in FIG. ("333"), the special symbol TZ is stopped at the big win ("333") indicating a big win, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

It should be noted that, as the first time variation display in the special time-saving gaming state, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, basically, the production is as shown in FIG. 84 (f) to FIG. 84 (i) However, the number stopped and displayed as the special symbol TZ becomes a small winning number ("3V3").

In addition, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, basically, the production transitions as shown in FIG. 84 (a) to FIG. 84 (i) will do.

In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the end of the jackpot game, when the transition to the special time-saving game state is performed, the variable performance dedicated to the rush performance is performed. A pattern is determined and it is possible to execute a rush effect (long rush effect) of a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special time-saving game state has been entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after executing the blackout effect in which the screen is shielded by a dark image (shielding image) as the rush effect of the special time-saving game state, the infinite mode rush effect is executed. Therefore, the transition from the normal game state to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state can be performed without discomfort, and the player can recognize that the transition to the special time-saving game state has occurred, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the special time-saving gaming state, the fourth right-handed image MG4 notifies the right-handed player (during the blackout effect, during the infinite mode entry effect). ing. Therefore, even a player who does not have knowledge about the special time-saving game state can understand that he will hit to the right, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is executed in a different effect mode from the case of shifting to the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, the player can be notified of the occurrence of the time-saving game state different from the normal time-saving game state, and the player can be notified of the occurrence of the special time-saving game state in a novel manner, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the special symbols for the first time after shifting to the special time-saving game state becomes a big hit, the rush performance of the special time-saving game state is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost due to the fact that the player has won the game in haste even after shifting to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special symbol fluctuation display after shifting to the special time-saving game state becomes a big hit or a small hit, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is not executed, but it is the same as when it is lost. In addition, it is also possible to execute the rush effect of the special time-saving game state.

In addition, when the first special pattern variable display after shifting to the special time-saving game state is the first special pattern variable display, the rush performance of the special time-saving game state is executed, and the second special pattern variable display is performed. In the case of , it is possible not to execute the rush effect of the special time-saving game state, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the rush effect of the special time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation display after shifting to the special time-saving game state, it is performed in the normal game state, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game. The stop display period of the special symbols in the variable display of the special symbols may be set to be longer than the normal stop display period, and the rush performance of the special time-saving game state may be executed during the stop display period. In this case, instead of changing the effect mode to the infinite mode by the end of the rush effect, the effect mode may be changed to the infinite mode by starting the variable display (variable effect) of the next special symbol.

(Example of production when countdown mode is executed)
Using FIGS. 85 and 86, a description will be given of an example of an effect when the countdown mode is executed due to the RWM clear being performed at the start of power supply. It should be noted that the countdown mode is set by the fact that the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time-saving game state in the normal game state has become a predetermined number (here, 50 times), and to move to the special time-saving game state This is a production mode in which a countdown display is performed to make the player anticipate.

Here, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state (production mode A) as the 450th special symbol variable display after the RWM is cleared at the start of the power supply. (Variation production) is started, "4" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area, and 4 is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B Two pending icons HI are displayed, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, 450 times is displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 450th special symbol variable display after the RWM is cleared at the start of the power supply, as shown in FIG. 85(c), The variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is started, the number of the first reservation number display area 70E decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reservations displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B Icons HI are shifted toward the icon display area 70C and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 450 times to 451 times.

At this time, since the conditions for activating the countdown mode of 50 times to the special time-saving gaming state are met, as shown in FIG. 85(d), the introduction effect of the countdown mode is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the door image TO (shielding image) closes so as to shield the background image, various icons, etc., and as shown in FIG. A character image of "entering mode" is displayed.

When the countdown mode is entered, as shown in FIG. 85(f), the door image TO disappears and the countdown mode background image is displayed. A countdown mode icon IC is displayed, and a character image of "49 remaining" indicating the remaining 49 times as a countdown display CD is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Also, the display mode of the effect pattern 70a changes from the display mode including characters and numbers to the display mode of only numbers.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. is reduced from "3" to "2", the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 451 to 452, and the countdown display CD is decremented to "48 remaining" indicating the remaining 48 games.

Then, the variable display (variable effect) and the stop display of the first special symbol are repeated, and after the 496th time of the first special symbol's variable time has elapsed after the RWM is cleared, the first special symbol is a lost special symbol. When the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 85(i), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with the losing number ("175"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the number of games GK is displayed as "496", and the countdown display CD is displayed as "4 remaining" indicating four remaining games.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 497th variable display of the special symbol after the RWM is cleared, as shown in FIG. The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are displayed in the icon display area 70C. , and one icon TI is displayed. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 496 times to 497 times, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "remaining 3", and the remaining variation until the special time-saving game state is entered in accordance with the start of the variation performance. When the number of times reaches 3, a countdown effect is started, and a character image of "3" indicating the remaining 3 times is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Further, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 498th variable display of the special symbol after the RWM is cleared, as shown in FIG. The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are displayed in the icon display area 70C. , and one icon TI is displayed. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 497 to 498, the countdown display CD is decremented to "2 remaining", and a character image of "2" indicating 2 remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 499th variable display of the special symbol after the RWM is cleared, as shown in FIG. The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are displayed in the icon display area 70C. , and one icon TI is displayed. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 498 to 499, the countdown display CD is decremented to "1 remaining", and a character image of "1" indicating one remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Further, when the first special symbol variable display (variable effect) is started as the 500th special symbol variable display which is the specified number of times after the RWM is cleared, the effect symbol 70a and The variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B It is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 499 to 500, the countdown display CD is decremented to "0 remaining", and a number image of "0" indicating 0 remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Since the special time-saving game state is started by the stop display of the losing special symbol, the first right-handed image MG1 is displayed in the right-handed corner of the screen to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

Further, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 86(r), the customer waiting state is started because the pending memory is "0", which corresponds to the normal game state. The mode A background image and the countdown display are maintained, and the transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is awaited.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) has passed since the start of the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. A guide image AN is displayed that says "help time is installed" indicating that it is being used. After that, when the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect elapses, the state shown in FIG. 86(s) state and so on repeatedly.

Thus, when the variable display of the special symbol before the predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) to shift to the special time-saving game state is executed, from any of the production modes AC corresponding to the normal game state to the countdown mode It is designed to be transferred. Therefore, it becomes easy for a player to recognize that it is a chance to shift to a special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

In addition, even in the countdown mode, a countdown effect that suggests moving to the special time-saving gaming state from the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (here, three times) before shifting to the special time-saving gaming state is executed. It has become so. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp the timing of occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, improve the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time of the 500th special symbol variation display, which is the specified number of times after the RWM is cleared, the special time-saving game state is entered, that is, during the stop time of the special symbol. , the notification of hitting to the right is performed by the first hitting to the right image MG1. Therefore, it is possible to quickly prompt the player to hit the ball to the right, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, at the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time of the 500th special symbol variation display, which is the specified number of times after the RWM is cleared, the special time-saving game state is entered. The transition to the infinite mode corresponding to is awaited. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to visually recognize the stop display of the production pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, even if it becomes a special time-saving gaming state, if it is in a customer waiting state, the countdown display is maintained, so for example, if you leave and come back, how will the game progress? It is possible to inform the player of the current state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, the countdown display is subtracted at the start of the variable display (variation effect) of the special symbols, but it may be subtracted at the time of the stop display of the special symbols.

(Production example when the variable production is executed after the transition to the special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of an effect example when a variable effect is executed after transition from the countdown mode to the special time-saving game state.

Here, as a result of the 500th fluctuation display of the special symbols after the RWM is cleared, the stop display of the losing special symbols is performed, and the special time-saving gaming state is generated, and the right-handed hitting notification is performed by the first right-handed hitting image MG1. It is assumed that

In that state, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. The effect is started, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, the number of games GK is increased from 500 to 501 times.

After that, when the variable display of the second special symbol is lost, as shown in FIG. rush effect) is executed. Specifically, an effect image (shielding image) of a size that shields a background image or the like is displayed together with a text image of "achieved", and a fourth right-handed image MG4 having a size larger than the first right-handed image MG1 is displayed. Is displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 87(c), an infinite mode entry display is performed to suggest entry into the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, when the display time of the infinite mode rush display has passed and the rush effect of the special time-saving game state ends, the rush effect diagram of the special time-saving game state ends, and the infinite mode background image and the second time-saving number of times (J2) The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "remaining 749 times". Also, the number of games GK is displayed again.

In addition, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. The effect (display of the countdown mode background image, etc.) continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses and the left production pattern 70a temporarily stops at "3", the right production pattern 70a also temporarily stops at "3" to form a ready-to-win state as shown in FIG. 87(f). Then, as shown in FIG. 87(g), a ready-to-win effect (ready-to-win change without rush effect) is executed.

Then, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the second special symbol is stop-displayed as the big hit special symbol, as shown in FIG. ("333"), the special symbol TZ is stopped at the big win ("333") indicating a big win, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

It should be noted that, as the first time variation display in the special time-saving gaming state, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, basically, the production is as shown in Figure 87 (e) ~ Figure 87 (h) However, the number stopped and displayed as the special symbol TZ becomes a small winning number ("3V3").

In addition, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, basically, the production transitions as shown in FIGS. 87(a) to 87(i). will do.

In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the RWM is cleared, the special time-saving game state is entered. It is determined and it is possible to execute a rush effect (short rush effect) of a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special time-saving game state has been entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the short rush effect is the fluctuation time of the shortest special figure variation pattern among the plurality of special figure variation patterns that may be determined in the specified number of times (500th) special symbol variation display after the RWM is cleared. set to a shorter time than Therefore, even if what kind of special figure fluctuation pattern is determined, rush production can be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the special symbols for the first time after shifting to the special time-saving game state becomes a big hit, the rush performance of the special time-saving game state is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost due to the fact that the player has won the game in haste even after shifting to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special symbol fluctuation display after shifting to the special time-saving game state becomes a big hit or a small hit, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is not executed, but it is the same as when it is lost. In addition, it is also possible to execute the rush effect of the special time-saving game state.

In addition, when the first special pattern variable display after shifting to the special time-saving game state is the first special pattern variable display, the rush performance of the special time-saving game state is executed, and the second special pattern variable display is performed. In the case of , it is possible not to execute the rush effect of the special time-saving game state, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the rush effect of the special time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation display after shifting to the special time-saving game state, it is performed in the normal game state, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game. The stop display period of the special symbols in the variable display of the special symbols may be set to be longer than the normal stop display period, and the rush performance of the special time-saving game state may be executed during the stop display period. In this case, instead of changing the effect mode to the infinite mode by the end of the rush effect, the effect mode may be changed to the infinite mode by starting the variable display (variable effect) of the next special symbol.

Also, in the countdown mode, an effect may be executed in which the friendly characters and the enemy characters battle. In this case, a character image such as "enter countdown mode, enter infinite mode if friendly character can withstand attack by enemy character until count reaches 0" may be displayed in the countdown mode introduction effect. Then, when shifting to the special time-saving game state, the ally character performs an effect that withstands the attack of the enemy character until the last round of special symbol fluctuation display (variation effect) in the normal game state, and shifts to the special time-saving game state. If not (the jackpot special symbol is stopped and the jackpot game is executed), the friend character cannot withstand the attack of the enemy character and loses (reach when the jackpot game is executed when not in the countdown mode). An effect opposite to the effect in which the friend character wins over the enemy character may be performed.

(Production example when the special time-saving game state ends)
With reference to FIG. 88, an effect example when the number of times of time saving (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the special time saving game state ends will be described.

Here, it is assumed that the countdown performance suggesting the end of the special time-saving game state is executed from the variable display (variation performance) of the special symbols three times before the special time-saving game state ends. Specifically, it is assumed that a number image of "3"→"2"→"1" is displayed every time the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbols is executed.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the fluctuation time passes in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol one time before the special time-saving gaming state ends and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing special symbol, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with a losing roll ("234"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. In addition, the time saving remaining number image KG displayed in the same position and in the same display manner as the normal time saving game state is "one remaining", and the number of games GK is the number of fluctuation display from before the special time saving game state occurs. It is "1249 times" that took over.

Then, when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol that ends the special time-saving gaming state is started, as shown in FIG. 88(b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the number of the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are directed toward the icon display area 70C One of them is displayed as the icon TI in shift display. At this time, the time saving remaining number image KG changes from "1 remaining" to "0 remaining", the number of games GK is increased from 1249 to 1250, and the number "0" indicating 0 remaining as a countdown effect. An image is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has passed and the second special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the normal game state is started by the stop display of the losing special symbol, so the first right-handed image MG1 is erased.

After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, an end-suggesting effect is executed to suggest that the time-saving gaming state is to end. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the shutter image SY is closed so as to shield the background image, various icons, and the like.

Then, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of loss) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, FIG. 88(d) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started and the number of the second pending number display area 70F is reduced from "3" to "2". do. It should be noted that the number of games GK remains hidden during the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if the variable effect is executed, the number of games is added only internally, and the number of games can be grasped visually. It is in a state where it cannot be done.

It should be noted that during the period in which the variable display based on the second special symbol remaining hold (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot announcement effect and the look-ahead The performance is not executed.

Further, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed, as shown in FIG. ) to stop the display.

Furthermore, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of losing) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, FIG. 88 (f) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started and the number of the second pending number display area 70F is reduced from "2" to "1". do.

Thereafter, the variable display and stop of the special symbol TZ in the state where the shutter image SY (shielding image) is displayed until the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes 0. Display is repeated.

Then, when the variation time of the second special symbol when the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes 0 has passed, as shown in FIG. 88 (g), the shutter While the image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a losing roll ("559").

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ elapses, as shown in FIG. 88(h), the shutter image SY (shielding image) disappears, the production mode A background image is displayed, and the first pending icon display area. 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed, and a left-handed shot image HG prompting the player to shoot a game ball is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a. Also, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the remaining reserved (first reserved storage) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserved number display area The number of 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. be done.

In this way, when the number of times of time saving (any of J1 to J3) is "0" and the special time saving game state ends, it is notified that it is in the normal game state (various effects images corresponding to production mode A are displayed ), the result display will not be executed before it is done. Therefore, the game can be progressed without giving a sense of loss that the player has missed the jackpot game and the time-saving game state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the shutter image SY is displayed over the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second special symbol remaining retention (second retention memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state from the variation display of the second special symbol that is the time saving final variation. Only the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to experience a novel performance that does not make the player strongly aware of the number of remaining reserved second special symbols, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when shifting to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of the series of effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from shooting game balls uselessly, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, in the special time-saving game state, the remaining time-saving number image KG is displayed at the same position and in the same display mode as the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the time saving game state and the remaining number of time saving games, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that during the period in which the variable display based on the second special symbol remaining hold (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot announcement effect and the look-ahead Instead of setting a state in which the performance is not executed, the execution of the big hit announcement performance may be permitted and the execution of the look-ahead performance may be restricted, or vice versa. In addition, the execution of specific notice effects (for example, win-loss decision effects, jackpot confirmation effects, etc.) among the jackpot notice effects is permitted, and other notice effects (for example, dialogue notice effects, roulette notice effects, cut-in notice effects, etc.) ) may be regulated, or execution of a specific effect (for example, lighting effect at the time of winning a prize, etc.) among the prefetch effects is permitted, and other effects (for example, prefetch zone effects, prefetch countdown effects, etc.) etc.) may be restricted.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, instead of displaying the time-saving remaining number image KG in the same position and in the same display mode as in the normal time-saving game state, the time-saving remaining number image KG is displayed in a different position and/or in a different display mode from the normal time-saving game state. KG may be displayed. If it does in this way, it will become easy to recognize whether it is a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

In addition, since the number of times of time saving (any of J1 to J3) is "0" and the special time saving game state is ended, it does not shift to the special time saving game state again, so the special time saving game state has ended. When the stopped power supply is resumed later and the control state of the game is restored, the number of times of games GK may be changed to a special time-saving game state such as ??? If it does in this way, a player can recognize that it is after the end of a special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

In addition, when the time saving number of times (any of J1 to J3) is "0" and the stopped power supply is resumed after the special time saving game state ends and the control state of the game is restored, a specific light emitting unit (For example, the top lamp 10b) may be made to emit light in a specific light emission mode (eg, red flashing at 750 ms period) different from the light emission mode at the time of error (eg, red flashing at 250 ms cycle). If it does in this way, a player can recognize that it is after the end of a special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

Further, when a specific light-emitting portion (for example, the top lamp 10b) is made to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode at the time of error, the blinking in the specific light-emitting mode rather than the flashing cycle in the light-emitting mode at the time of error The cycle may be shortened or may be the same.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in the second embodiment, the point that the normal time-saving game state ends even if the remaining number of small hits remains due to the stop display of a specific small hit special symbol, and the number of remaining small hits set for each big hit game. is different from the first embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Game state setting table)
Figure 89 (a) is a diagram showing a first game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game not via the small hit game, Figure 89 (b) is via the small hit game It is a diagram showing a second game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the first game state setting table includes stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, game state information at the time of jackpot winning indicating the game state at the time of jackpot winning, and game state to be set. A flag (a time-saving flag indicating that it is a time-saving game state), a first time-saving number (J1) that is the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol that ends the time-saving game state, and a second special that ends the time-saving game state The second time-saving number of times (J2), which is the number of times of variable display of the symbol, and the third time-saving number of times (J3), which is the number of times of variable display of the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to end the time-saving gaming state, The remaining number of small hits (Z1), which is the number of times of small hit fluctuation display to end the time saving game state, and the third small win remaining number of times, which is the number of times of specific small hit fluctuation display to end the time saving game state, are associated. It is

As shown in FIG. 89(b), in the second game state setting table, there are stop special symbol data of a small hit special symbol, and a game state at the time of passage of a specific area 53 indicating the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53. Information, the set game state flag (time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving game state), the first time saving number (J1) which is the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol that ends the time saving game state, and time saving The second time-saving number of times (J2), which is the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol that ends the gaming state, and the number of times of variable display of the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that ends the time-saving gaming state. The number of times of 3 o'clock (J3), the number of small hits remaining (Z1) that is the number of times of small hit fluctuation display that ends the time saving game state, and the third small that is the number of times of specific small hit fluctuation display that ends the time saving game state and the remaining number of hits are associated with each other.

As the first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 89, in addition to the remaining number of small hits (Z1), which is the number of times of all types of small hit fluctuation display, a specific small hit fluctuation (third small hit game The point is that the third small winning remaining number of times (Z2), which is the number of times of fluctuation display that will be executed, is set. By doing so, it is possible to make the player interested in the types of small winning fluctuations, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. ) and the number of remaining third small hits (Z2) may be set to different numbers. By doing so, it is possible to create a case where the time-saving game state ends even if it is any kind of small hit fluctuation, and a case where the time-saving game state ends only with a specific small hit fluctuation, and the game It is possible to improve the interest of

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 . Here, only differences from the special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 27 will be described, and descriptions of the same portions will be omitted.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small winning special symbol is stopped. If it is not a small hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S320-13, and if it is a small hit special symbol, in step S320-10, until the time saving game state saved in the game RWM area is ended. Subtract 1 from the remaining number of small hits (Z1).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small winning special symbol is the third small winning special symbol (special symbol 15) in step S320-10A. If it is not the third small winning special symbol, the process is moved to step S320-11, and if it is the third small winning special symbol, in step S320-10B, the second small winning remaining number (Z2) is subtracted by 1. do.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the third remaining number of small wins (Z2) has become "0" in step S320-11. When the remaining number of small hits (Z1) or the remaining number of third small hits (Z2) becomes "0", the process is shifted to step S320-12 assuming that the time saving game state is terminated, and the remaining number of small hits If not "0", the process moves to step S320-13.

In this way, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed (a small winning game is executed) during the time saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 47, the number of times of time saving (J1, J2, J3) remains, the time-saving game state is terminated when the remaining number of small hits (Z1) or the remaining number of third small hits (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, it is possible for the player to proceed with the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effect or the combination of the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a (whether or not to aim for an advantageous big hit by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small winning game). ), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the game method during the time-saving game state, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed (small winning game is executed) during the time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 47, the remaining number of small winnings (Z1) remains. Even if it is, the time-saving game state is terminated when the third small winning remaining number (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, it is possible for the player to proceed with the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effect or the combination of the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a (whether or not to aim for an advantageous big hit by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small winning game). ), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the game method during the time-saving game state, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
◆Here, conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information obtained based on the winning of the game medium in the start area, and depending on the result of the determination, A gaming machine that executes a game effect is common. In such a game machine, it has a movable body (starting opening opening/closing member, big winning opening opening/closing member, specific area opening/closing member, etc.) operated by a driving source (solenoid, etc.) controlled by the main control board, In some cases, a movable body is operated by activating a drive source according to the progress of a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-118109). However, in such a game machine, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game shop (only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500 is replaced). ), etc., it is difficult to check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing games, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a controller controlled by the main control means. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, A first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, a specific region opening/closing member 52, and a second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) are provided, and the main control means starts controlling the progress of the game after power supply is started. In the pre-start state (during the initial setting process) up to, the drive source can be initialized (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a controller controlled by the main control means A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, First big prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) and establishment of awarding conditions (winning of game ball to winning opening, start opening, big winning opening) and value giving means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of giving value (prize balls, prize ball data), and the main control means operates after power supply is started. In the pre-start state (during initial setting processing) until the progress control of is started, it is possible to initialize the drive source in a predetermined manner (ON ⇔ OFF), and in the pre-start state, the value addition invalidate the awarding of the prize value by means; Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a controller controlled by the main control means A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, 1st large winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57), the main control means, the establishment of the starting condition (starting opening or game ball to the normal gate Based on the input ball), the display means (special symbol display device, normal symbol display device) executes the variable display of the symbol, and the advantageous game (special game, auxiliary game) that operates the driving source according to the result of the variable display ), and in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from the start of power supply to the start of the progress control of the game, the drive source is initialized in a predetermined manner (ON ⇔OFF), and in the pre-start state, the execution of the variable display and the execution of the advantageous game are restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the drive source (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b) controlled by the main control means , first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) operated by movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area An opening/closing member 52 and a second prize winning opening opening/closing member 57), wherein the main control means includes an initial operation means capable of initializing the driving source in a predetermined manner (ON⇔OFF), and a game Information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on actual results (normal payout count, normal out count) and displaying the specific information on information display means (performance display monitor); , and in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from the start of power supply to the start of the progress control of the game, the initial operation is executed by the initial operation means, and the initial operation is performed. During execution, display of the specific information by the information display means is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a controller controlled by the main control means A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, First big prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) and establishment of awarding conditions (winning of game ball to winning opening, start opening, big winning opening) A value giving means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of giving value (prize balls, prize ball data) is provided, and progress control of the game is started after power supply is started. In the pre-start state (during the initial setting process), the awarding of the prize value by the value providing means is invalidated, and the main control means initializes the drive source in a predetermined manner (ON⇔OFF). Specific information (normal base value) is calculated based on the initial operation means that can be used and the game performance (normal payout number, normal out number), and the specific information is displayed on the information display means (performance display monitor) and information display means capable of displaying, wherein the initial action is executed by the initial action means in the pre-start state, and the specific information is displayed by the information display means during execution of the initial action. display is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a controller controlled by the main control means A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, 1st large winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57), the main control means, the establishment of the starting condition (starting opening or game ball to the normal gate A variable display means capable of executing a variable display of symbols on a display means (special symbol display device, normal symbol display device) based on the ball entry), and operating the driving source according to the result of the variable display. Advantageous game means capable of executing advantageous games (small winning game, big winning game), initial operation means capable of initializing the drive source in a predetermined manner (ON ⇔ OFF), and game results ( information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on the number of payouts during normal period, number of outs during normal period, and displaying the specific information on information display means (performance display monitor); and in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from the start of power supply to the start of the progress control of the game, the initial operation is executed by the initial operation means, and during the execution of the initial operation , execution of the variable display by the variable display means, execution of the advantageous game by the advantageous game means, and display of the specific information by the information display means are restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

(Content 2 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game or a specific game advantageous to the player based on establishment of a starting condition. Some of these gaming machines execute a special game based on the passage of a game medium through a specific area provided inside a winning device during execution of a specific game (for example, 2018-057968). However, such a game machine has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game) or a specific game (small winning game) that is advantageous to the player is based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the starting port). ), a normal game state, and a game state control means that can be controlled to a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the A prize winning device (big prize winning port) for changing a state in which game media are difficult to win to a state in which game media are easy to win during execution of a specific game, and a prize winning device provided inside the prize winning device during execution of the specific game. special game executing means for executing the special game based on the game medium passing through the specified area (specific area 53), wherein the game medium passes through the specific area during execution of the specific game. Based on the game state at that time, it is possible to perform a predetermined process (such as a process of setting game conditions after a big win game). By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the starting port). A determination means for determining, and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination means is the second A first determination means for making a determination based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition (winning a prize at the first starting gate), and a second determining means for making a determination based on the satisfaction of the second starting condition (winning a prize at the second starting gate). The special game includes a first special game (eg, first jackpot game, third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (eg, second When it is determined that the special game is to be executed by the first determination means, either the first special game or the second special game can be executed, and the specific game The state includes a specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled via the special game, and a specific game state (special time-saving game state) controlled without the special game. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the start condition (game ball winning a prize in the start port). Determination means for determining whether or not; game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state; and execution of the special game Inside, there is a winning device (large winning opening) that changes from a state in which game media are difficult to win to a state in which game media are easy to win, and a specific area provided inside the winning device during execution of the special game. A game state determining means capable of determining a game state to be controlled after that based on the passage of the game medium through the (specified area 53). By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the start condition (game ball winning in the start port). and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination The means includes a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning the first starting opening) and a second determining means for making a judgment based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning the second starting opening). The special game includes a first special game (e.g., third jackpot game) and a second special game (e.g., first jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game. , second jackpot game), the determination result of the determination means includes a first result (big win) and a second result (small win) different from the first result, and the first determination means When it is determined that the first result (jackpot) is determined by, either the first special game or the second special game can be executed, and the specific game state is the first special game The first specific game state controlled after the end (the normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number is set to 7 times: rush battle mode) and the second specific game state controlled after the end of the second special game (Normal time saving game state in which the second time saving number is set to 55 times: wild dance mode, normal time saving game state in which the second time saving number is set to 95 times: wild dance mode). By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the start condition (game ball winning a prize in the start port). and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination The means includes first determination means for making a determination based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition (winning at the first start opening) and second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning at the second starting opening). means, and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game (for example, a second V jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game. and a third special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the determination result of the determination means includes a first result (jackpot) and , There is a second result (small hit) different from the first result, and when the first result (big hit) is determined by the first determination means, the first special game and the second Any of the special games can be executed, and when the second result (small hit) is determined by the second determination means, the second special game can be executed, and the second determination means When the first result (jackpot) is determined, the third special game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the start condition (game ball winning in the start port). and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination The means includes a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning the first starting opening) and a second determining means for making a judgment based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning the second starting opening). 2 determination means, and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game (for example, a second V jackpot) that is more advantageous than the first special game game) and a third special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) more advantageous than the second special game, and the determination result of the determination means includes a first result (jackpot ) and a second result (small hit) different from the first result, and in the specific game state (random dance mode, super wild dance mode) controlled after the second special game is executed, the When the first result (big win) is determined by the second determination means, the third special game can be executed, and when the second result (small win) is determined by the second determination means , the second special game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the start condition (game ball winning in the start hole). and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination The means includes a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning the first starting opening) and a second determining means for making a judgment based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning the second starting opening). 2 determination means, and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game (for example, a second V jackpot) that is more advantageous than the first special game game) and a third special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) more advantageous than the second special game, and the determination result of the determination means includes a first result (jackpot ) and a second result (minor win) different from the first result, and in the specific game state (infinite mode) controlled after the third special game is executed, the second determination means When it is determined that the first result (big hit) by, the third special game can be executed, and when it is determined that the second result (small hit) is determined by the second determination means, the second 2 special games can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As the eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the start condition (game ball winning in the start port). determination means for determining whether or not, variation display execution means for executing variation display of symbols based on the determination by the determination means, a normal game state, and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state), a first production mode (production modes A to C), and a second production mode (countdown mode) different from the first production mode. A controllable effect control means is provided, and the determination means includes a first determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the first start opening), and the establishment of the second start condition (first 2, the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game than the first special game. There is an advantageous second special game (for example, a first jackpot game, a third jackpot game, a fourth jackpot game, and a fifth jackpot game), and the game state control means performs a predetermined number of times after the special game ends. It is possible to control to the specific game state until the variable display is executed, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled via the special game, There is a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the effect control means controls the second specific game state a predetermined number of times (50 times) before When the variable display is executed, control is performed from the first presentation mode (any of presentation modes A to C) to the second presentation mode (countdown mode). By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be performed. The variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the winning order of the game balls to the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47 .

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed not to generate a probability variable gaming state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game, but depending on the type of the jackpot special symbol, the probability variable gaming state is not generated. In this case, in a specific round game (for example, the second round game or the final round game) during the jackpot game, the specific area 53 provided inside the first big winning hole 50 It is possible to perform processing for generating a probability variation gaming state on the condition that the game ball has passed, or based on the gaming state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, the variable display that becomes the probability variation gaming state. A process of determining the number of times may be performed.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and when winning symbols are stopped and displayed on an active line by a game using medals (game media) (fulfillment conditions are satisfied), a predetermined amount is reached. It can also be used for a reel-type game machine (so-called slot machine) capable of awarding a player with a prize medal (prize medal data). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 game machine 5 game board 44 normal figure gate 45 first starting port 47 second starting port 50 first big winning port 56 second big winning port 70 first image display device 71 second image display device 110 main control board 110a main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Effect control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition;
Variation display execution means for performing variation display of special symbols in any one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the determination means;
a game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous than the normal game state;
initialization means capable of initializing the control state of the game;
During the variable display of the special symbols, it is possible to execute a variable performance for variably displaying a plurality of performance symbols, and control to a first performance mode and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode. and a possible production control means,
The determination means has a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game,
In the specific game state,
There is a first specific game state controlled via the special game and a second specific game state controlled without the special game,
The game state control means is
It is possible to control to the first specific game state until the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game is finished,
It is possible to control to the second specific game state by the number of consecutive times of the variable display of the special symbol, which is a losing result executed after the establishment of the predetermined condition, reaches the specified number of times,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times before being controlled to the second specific game state, it is possible to control from the first production mode to the second production mode,
The variable display executing means
When the second specific game state is controlled after the predetermined condition is established by the execution of the special game, and when the predetermined condition is established by the initialization of the control state of the game, the second specific game state is controlled. It is possible to execute the variable display of the special symbol with a different variation pattern ,
The production control means is
When the specific game state ends, it is possible to execute a variable effect when the specific game state ends,
It is possible to change the execution mode of the variable performance when the specific game state ends, depending on whether the first specific game state ends or the second specific game state ends. Amusement machine.

Images